WO2019123124A1 - Polymeric materials formed using initiators with two thiocarbonylthio-containing groups - Google Patents
Polymeric materials formed using initiators with two thiocarbonylthio-containing groups Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2019123124A1 WO2019123124A1 PCT/IB2018/059954 IB2018059954W WO2019123124A1 WO 2019123124 A1 WO2019123124 A1 WO 2019123124A1 IB 2018059954 W IB2018059954 W IB 2018059954W WO 2019123124 A1 WO2019123124 A1 WO 2019123124A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- formula
- weight percent
- monomer
- polymeric material
- polymeric
- Prior art date
Links
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 title claims abstract description 275
- 239000003999 initiator Substances 0.000 title claims abstract description 23
- -1 thiocarbonylthio Chemical group 0.000 title description 49
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 393
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 356
- 239000011541 reaction mixture Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 89
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 101
- 125000000623 heterocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 64
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 63
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrogen Substances N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 58
- 125000003545 alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 56
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 51
- 238000004132 cross linking Methods 0.000 claims description 43
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims description 43
- 125000003107 substituted aryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 41
- QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrogen group Chemical group [N] QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 40
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 claims description 38
- 125000003710 aryl alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 33
- 125000002102 aryl alkyloxo group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 29
- 125000005842 heteroatom Chemical group 0.000 claims description 29
- NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfur Chemical group [S] NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 23
- 229910052717 sulfur Chemical group 0.000 claims description 23
- 239000011593 sulfur Chemical group 0.000 claims description 23
- 125000005843 halogen group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 22
- 229920006395 saturated elastomer Polymers 0.000 claims description 22
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical group [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 21
- 125000002837 carbocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 21
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 21
- 239000001301 oxygen Chemical group 0.000 claims description 21
- 239000013536 elastomeric material Substances 0.000 claims description 8
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 abstract description 31
- BGPJLYIFDLICMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4,2,3-dioxadithiolan-5-one Chemical group O=C1OSSO1 BGPJLYIFDLICMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 abstract description 12
- DKVNPHBNOWQYFE-UHFFFAOYSA-N carbamodithioic acid Chemical compound NC(S)=S DKVNPHBNOWQYFE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 abstract description 10
- 239000012990 dithiocarbamate Substances 0.000 abstract description 10
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 abstract description 6
- 125000000468 ketone group Chemical group 0.000 abstract description 5
- 125000004432 carbon atom Chemical group C* 0.000 description 122
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 71
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 64
- XEKOWRVHYACXOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethyl acetate Chemical compound CCOC(C)=O XEKOWRVHYACXOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 60
- 150000003254 radicals Chemical class 0.000 description 60
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 54
- 238000006116 polymerization reaction Methods 0.000 description 45
- CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetone Chemical compound CC(C)=O CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 42
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 37
- 125000003647 acryloyl group Chemical group O=C([*])C([H])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 29
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 27
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 26
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-M Acrylate Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)C=C NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 25
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 24
- 150000001252 acrylic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 22
- HRPVXLWXLXDGHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acrylamide Chemical compound NC(=O)C=C HRPVXLWXLXDGHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 21
- 238000010526 radical polymerization reaction Methods 0.000 description 21
- 229940117913 acrylamide Drugs 0.000 description 20
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 20
- CQEYYJKEWSMYFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N butyl acrylate Chemical compound CCCCOC(=O)C=C CQEYYJKEWSMYFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 19
- GOXQRTZXKQZDDN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Ethylhexyl acrylate Chemical compound CCCCC(CC)COC(=O)C=C GOXQRTZXKQZDDN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- 239000006188 syrup Substances 0.000 description 16
- 235000020357 syrup Nutrition 0.000 description 16
- 230000000052 comparative effect Effects 0.000 description 15
- 125000000391 vinyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 15
- 229920002554 vinyl polymer Polymers 0.000 description 15
- 238000005227 gel permeation chromatography Methods 0.000 description 13
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 13
- ZWEHNKRNPOVVGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Butanone Chemical compound CCC(C)=O ZWEHNKRNPOVVGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 239000004820 Pressure-sensitive adhesive Substances 0.000 description 12
- WYURNTSHIVDZCO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tetrahydrofuran Chemical compound C1CCOC1 WYURNTSHIVDZCO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 12
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 12
- 125000003342 alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 11
- 230000009477 glass transition Effects 0.000 description 11
- 239000003960 organic solvent Substances 0.000 description 11
- 150000003926 acrylamides Chemical class 0.000 description 10
- 239000003828 free initiator Substances 0.000 description 10
- 229920001519 homopolymer Polymers 0.000 description 10
- VLKZOEOYAKHREP-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-Hexane Chemical class CCCCCC VLKZOEOYAKHREP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 10
- 238000006303 photolysis reaction Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000015843 photosynthesis, light reaction Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 10
- WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetonitrile Chemical compound CC#N WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 125000002947 alkylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 9
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 9
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- QGJOPFRUJISHPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon disulfide Chemical compound S=C=S QGJOPFRUJISHPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- IMNFDUFMRHMDMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-Heptane Chemical compound CCCCCCC IMNFDUFMRHMDMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- HEDRZPFGACZZDS-MICDWDOJSA-N Trichloro(2H)methane Chemical compound [2H]C(Cl)(Cl)Cl HEDRZPFGACZZDS-MICDWDOJSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 239000002390 adhesive tape Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000012074 organic phase Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000003756 stirring Methods 0.000 description 8
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 8
- CFVWNXQPGQOHRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methylpropyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)COC(=O)C=C CFVWNXQPGQOHRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Diethyl ether Chemical compound CCOCC RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 238000005481 NMR spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 7
- IRZFQKXEKAODTJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;propan-2-yloxymethanedithioate Chemical compound [Na+].CC(C)OC([S-])=S IRZFQKXEKAODTJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 7
- UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Benzene Chemical group C1=CC=CC=C1 UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Toluene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1 YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 125000003368 amide group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 150000001721 carbon Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- YLQBMQCUIZJEEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrahydrofuran Natural products C=1C=COC=1 YLQBMQCUIZJEEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 0 CC(C1)C11CC(C)*CC1 Chemical compound CC(C1)C11CC(C)*CC1 0.000 description 5
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- PPBRXRYQALVLMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Styrene Chemical compound C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 PPBRXRYQALVLMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000007795 chemical reaction product Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000004440 column chromatography Methods 0.000 description 5
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 125000004404 heteroalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000000741 silica gel Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229910002027 silica gel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 5
- KWVGIHKZDCUPEU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C(OC)(OC)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 KWVGIHKZDCUPEU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- SOGAXMICEFXMKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butylmethacrylate Chemical compound CCCCOC(=O)C(C)=C SOGAXMICEFXMKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000013032 Hydrocarbon resin Substances 0.000 description 4
- KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Isopropanol Chemical compound CC(C)O KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methacrylic acid Chemical compound CC(=C)C(O)=O CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- HVVWZTWDBSEWIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N [2-(hydroxymethyl)-3-prop-2-enoyloxy-2-(prop-2-enoyloxymethyl)propyl] prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCC(CO)(COC(=O)C=C)COC(=O)C=C HVVWZTWDBSEWIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylic acid group Chemical group C(C=C)(=O)O NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229920001400 block copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 229920006270 hydrocarbon resin Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 description 4
- 239000013033 iniferter Substances 0.000 description 4
- 125000001434 methanylylidene group Chemical group [H]C#[*] 0.000 description 4
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000000655 nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229920005604 random copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229910001220 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000010935 stainless steel Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000003643 water by type Substances 0.000 description 4
- CERJZAHSUZVMCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2-dichloro-1-phenylethanone Chemical compound ClC(Cl)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 CERJZAHSUZVMCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- SMZOUWXMTYCWNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2-methoxy-5-methylphenyl)ethanamine Chemical compound COC1=CC=C(C)C=C1CCN SMZOUWXMTYCWNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- RSWGJHLUYNHPMX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Abietic-Saeure Natural products C12CCC(C(C)C)=CC2=CCC2C1(C)CCCC2(C)C(O)=O RSWGJHLUYNHPMX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- YMWUJEATGCHHMB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dichloromethane Chemical compound ClCCl YMWUJEATGCHHMB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methanol Chemical compound OC OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 3
- KHPCPRHQVVSZAH-HUOMCSJISA-N Rosin Natural products O(C/C=C/c1ccccc1)[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 KHPCPRHQVVSZAH-HUOMCSJISA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000000113 differential scanning calorimetry Methods 0.000 description 3
- 125000002768 hydroxyalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 3
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 3
- VIKNJXKGJWUCNN-XGXHKTLJSA-N norethisterone Chemical compound O=C1CC[C@@H]2[C@H]3CC[C@](C)([C@](CC4)(O)C#C)[C@@H]4[C@@H]3CCC2=C1 VIKNJXKGJWUCNN-XGXHKTLJSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000012071 phase Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229920000139 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000005020 polyethylene terephthalate Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000000379 polymerizing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 150000003097 polyterpenes Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 238000000425 proton nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum Methods 0.000 description 3
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- WWGXHTXOZKVJDN-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;n,n-diethylcarbamodithioate;trihydrate Chemical compound O.O.O.[Na+].CCN(CC)C([S-])=S WWGXHTXOZKVJDN-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 3
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 3
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 3
- KHPCPRHQVVSZAH-UHFFFAOYSA-N trans-cinnamyl beta-D-glucopyranoside Natural products OC1C(O)C(O)C(CO)OC1OCC=CC1=CC=CC=C1 KHPCPRHQVVSZAH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 3
- MYWOJODOMFBVCB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2,6-trimethylphenanthrene Chemical compound CC1=CC=C2C3=CC(C)=CC=C3C=CC2=C1C MYWOJODOMFBVCB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JWYVGKFDLWWQJX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenylazepan-2-one Chemical compound C=CN1CCCCCC1=O JWYVGKFDLWWQJX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OXBLVCZKDOZZOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3-Dihydrothiophene Chemical compound C1CC=CS1 OXBLVCZKDOZZOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LEJBBGNFPAFPKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2-prop-2-enoyloxyethoxy)ethyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCCOCCOC(=O)C=C LEJBBGNFPAFPKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- INQDDHNZXOAFFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[2-(2-prop-2-enoyloxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCCOCCOCCOC(=O)C=C INQDDHNZXOAFFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HCLJOFJIQIJXHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[2-[2-(2-prop-2-enoyloxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCCOCCOCCOCCOC(=O)C=C HCLJOFJIQIJXHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XMLYCEVDHLAQEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenylpropan-1-one Chemical compound CC(C)(O)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 XMLYCEVDHLAQEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000000954 2-hydroxyethyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])O[H] 0.000 description 2
- LWRBVKNFOYUCNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methyl-1-(4-methylsulfanylphenyl)-2-morpholin-4-ylpropan-1-one Chemical compound C1=CC(SC)=CC=C1C(=O)C(C)(C)N1CCOCC1 LWRBVKNFOYUCNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QOXOZONBQWIKDA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-hydroxypropyl Chemical group [CH2]CCO QOXOZONBQWIKDA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DXPPIEDUBFUSEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-methylheptyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)CCCCCOC(=O)C=C DXPPIEDUBFUSEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonia Chemical compound N QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KAKZBPTYRLMSJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butadiene Chemical compound C=CC=C KAKZBPTYRLMSJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LCGLNKUTAGEVQW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethyl ether Chemical compound COC LCGLNKUTAGEVQW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-OWOJBTEDSA-N Fumaric acid Chemical compound OC(=O)\C=C\C(O)=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-OWOJBTEDSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RRHGJUQNOFWUDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Isoprene Chemical compound CC(=C)C=C RRHGJUQNOFWUDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-M Methacrylate Chemical compound CC(=C)C([O-])=O CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- WHNWPMSKXPGLAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-Vinyl-2-pyrrolidone Chemical compound C=CN1CCCC1=O WHNWPMSKXPGLAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CTQNGGLPUBDAKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N O-Xylene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1C CTQNGGLPUBDAKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 244000028419 Styrax benzoin Species 0.000 description 2
- 235000000126 Styrax benzoin Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 235000008411 Sumatra benzointree Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- DAKWPKUUDNSNPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Trimethylolpropane triacrylate Chemical group C=CC(=O)OCC(CC)(COC(=O)C=C)COC(=O)C=C DAKWPKUUDNSNPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XTXRWKRVRITETP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Vinyl acetate Chemical compound CC(=O)OC=C XTXRWKRVRITETP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CKESHWQHGBKZBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N [4-(diethylcarbamothioylsulfanylmethyl)phenyl]methyl n,n-diethylcarbamodithioate Chemical compound CCN(CC)C(=S)SCC1=CC=C(CSC(=S)N(CC)CC)C=C1 CKESHWQHGBKZBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000008062 acetophenones Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000002378 acidificating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000001335 aliphatic alkanes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000003277 amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000004104 aryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 229960002130 benzoin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000011203 carbon fibre reinforced carbon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000002915 carbonyl group Chemical group [*:2]C([*:1])=O 0.000 description 2
- 239000012986 chain transfer agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003750 conditioning effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- JHIVVAPYMSGYDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexanone Chemical compound O=C1CCCCC1 JHIVVAPYMSGYDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ISAOCJYIOMOJEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N desyl alcohol Natural products C=1C=CC=CC=1C(O)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 ISAOCJYIOMOJEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004386 diacrylate group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920001971 elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- ZOOODBUHSVUZEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethoxymethanedithioic acid Chemical class CCOC(S)=S ZOOODBUHSVUZEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethylene glycol Natural products OCCO LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XLLIQLLCWZCATF-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate Natural products COCCOC(C)=O XLLIQLLCWZCATF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000001153 fluoro group Chemical group F* 0.000 description 2
- 239000006260 foam Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000012634 fragment Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000013467 fragmentation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000006062 fragmentation reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000019382 gum benzoic Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000006897 homolysis reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 description 2
- 239000012948 isocyanate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000002576 ketones Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- XMGQYMWWDOXHJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N limonene Chemical compound CC(=C)C1CCC(C)=CC1 XMGQYMWWDOXHJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 2
- XJRBAMWJDBPFIM-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl vinyl ether Chemical compound COC=C XJRBAMWJDBPFIM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000012705 nitroxide-mediated radical polymerization Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000002923 oximes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000000123 paper Substances 0.000 description 2
- RPGWZZNNEUHDAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenylphosphine Chemical compound PC1=CC=CC=C1 RPGWZZNNEUHDAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920003229 poly(methyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920006267 polyester film Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920002635 polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004814 polyurethane Substances 0.000 description 2
- JCBJVAJGLKENNC-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium ethyl xanthate Chemical compound [K+].CCOC([S-])=S JCBJVAJGLKENNC-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 239000012265 solid product Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011550 stock solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001897 terpolymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000010998 test method Methods 0.000 description 2
- HJUGFYREWKUQJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrabromomethane Chemical compound BrC(Br)(Br)Br HJUGFYREWKUQJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000003573 thiols Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UHFFFAOYSA-N trans-butenedioic acid Natural products OC(=O)C=CC(O)=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000844 transformation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000008096 xylene Substances 0.000 description 2
- GRWFGVWFFZKLTI-UHFFFAOYSA-N α-pinene Chemical compound CC1=CCC2C(C)(C)C1C2 GRWFGVWFFZKLTI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WTARULDDTDQWMU-RKDXNWHRSA-N (+)-β-pinene Chemical compound C1[C@H]2C(C)(C)[C@@H]1CCC2=C WTARULDDTDQWMU-RKDXNWHRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WTARULDDTDQWMU-IUCAKERBSA-N (-)-Nopinene Natural products C1[C@@H]2C(C)(C)[C@H]1CCC2=C WTARULDDTDQWMU-IUCAKERBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QNODIIQQMGDSEF-UHFFFAOYSA-N (1-hydroxycyclohexyl)-phenylmethanone Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C(=O)C1(O)CCCCC1 QNODIIQQMGDSEF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SZCWBURCISJFEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N (3-hydroxy-2,2-dimethylpropyl) 3-hydroxy-2,2-dimethylpropanoate Chemical compound OCC(C)(C)COC(=O)C(C)(C)CO SZCWBURCISJFEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WRIDQFICGBMAFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N (E)-8-Octadecenoic acid Natural products CCCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCC(O)=O WRIDQFICGBMAFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MSAHTMIQULFMRG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2-diphenyl-2-propan-2-yloxyethanone Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C(OC(C)C)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 MSAHTMIQULFMRG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RYHBNJHYFVUHQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-Dioxane Chemical compound C1COCCO1 RYHBNJHYFVUHQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PWMWNFMRSKOCEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-Phenyl-1,2-ethanediol Chemical compound OCC(O)C1=CC=CC=C1 PWMWNFMRSKOCEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZDQNWDNMNKSMHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-[2-(2-prop-2-enoyloxypropoxy)propoxy]propan-2-yl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OC(C)COC(C)COCC(C)OC(=O)C=C ZDQNWDNMNKSMHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UNILWMWFPHPYOR-KXEYIPSPSA-M 1-[6-[2-[3-[3-[3-[2-[2-[3-[[2-[2-[[(2r)-1-[[2-[[(2r)-1-[3-[2-[2-[3-[[2-(2-amino-2-oxoethoxy)acetyl]amino]propoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]propylamino]-3-hydroxy-1-oxopropan-2-yl]amino]-2-oxoethyl]amino]-3-[(2r)-2,3-di(hexadecanoyloxy)propyl]sulfanyl-1-oxopropan-2-yl Chemical compound O=C1C(SCCC(=O)NCCCOCCOCCOCCCNC(=O)COCC(=O)N[C@@H](CSC[C@@H](COC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@H](CO)C(=O)NCCCOCCOCCOCCCNC(=O)COCC(N)=O)CC(=O)N1CCNC(=O)CCCCCN\1C2=CC=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C2CC/1=C/C=C/C=C/C1=[N+](CC)C2=CC=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C2C1 UNILWMWFPHPYOR-KXEYIPSPSA-M 0.000 description 1
- KPAPHODVWOVUJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-benzofuran;1h-indene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CC=CC2=C1.C1=CC=C2OC=CC2=C1 KPAPHODVWOVUJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NVJUHMXYKCUMQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethoxypropane Chemical compound CCCOCC NVJUHMXYKCUMQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LMAUULKNZLEMGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethyl-3,5-dimethylbenzene Chemical compound CCC1=CC(C)=CC(C)=C1 LMAUULKNZLEMGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012956 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl-ketone Substances 0.000 description 1
- XLPJNCYCZORXHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-morpholin-4-ylprop-2-en-1-one Chemical compound C=CC(=O)N1CCOCC1 XLPJNCYCZORXHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NNQPQJLMERNWGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 11-methyldodecyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)C=C NNQPQJLMERNWGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- STFXXRRQKFUYEU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 16-methylheptadecyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)C=C STFXXRRQKFUYEU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HECLRDQVFMWTQS-RGOKHQFPSA-N 1755-01-7 Chemical compound C1[C@H]2[C@@H]3CC=C[C@@H]3[C@@H]1C=C2 HECLRDQVFMWTQS-RGOKHQFPSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GRWFGVWFFZKLTI-IUCAKERBSA-N 1S,5S-(-)-alpha-Pinene Natural products CC1=CC[C@@H]2C(C)(C)[C@H]1C2 GRWFGVWFFZKLTI-IUCAKERBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KFTUNOVZJWIKFX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2-dibromo-1-(4-bromophenyl)ethanone Chemical compound BrC(Br)C(=O)C1=CC=C(Br)C=C1 KFTUNOVZJWIKFX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PIZHFBODNLEQBL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2-diethoxy-1-phenylethanone Chemical compound CCOC(OCC)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 PIZHFBODNLEQBL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FTALTLPZDVFJSS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCOCCOCCOC(=O)C=C FTALTLPZDVFJSS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PRAMZQXXPOLCIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2-methylprop-2-enoyloxy)ethanesulfonic acid Chemical compound CC(=C)C(=O)OCCS(O)(=O)=O PRAMZQXXPOLCIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JAHNSTQSQJOJLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(3-fluorophenyl)-1h-imidazole Chemical compound FC1=CC=CC(C=2NC=CN=2)=C1 JAHNSTQSQJOJLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000536 2-Acrylamido-2-methylpropane sulfonic acid Polymers 0.000 description 1
- GJKGAPPUXSSCFI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Hydroxy-4'-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-2-methylpropiophenone Chemical compound CC(C)(O)C(=O)C1=CC=C(OCCO)C=C1 GJKGAPPUXSSCFI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XNWFRZJHXBZDAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-METHOXYETHANOL Chemical compound COCCO XNWFRZJHXBZDAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XHZPRMZZQOIPDS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Methyl-2-[(1-oxo-2-propenyl)amino]-1-propanesulfonic acid Chemical compound OS(=O)(=O)CC(C)(C)NC(=O)C=C XHZPRMZZQOIPDS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FDSUVTROAWLVJA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[[3-hydroxy-2,2-bis(hydroxymethyl)propoxy]methyl]-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol;prop-2-enoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C=C.OC(=O)C=C.OC(=O)C=C.OC(=O)C=C.OC(=O)C=C.OCC(CO)(CO)COCC(CO)(CO)CO FDSUVTROAWLVJA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UHFFVFAKEGKNAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-benzyl-2-(dimethylamino)-1-(4-morpholin-4-ylphenyl)butan-1-one Chemical compound C=1C=C(N2CCOCC2)C=CC=1C(=O)C(CC)(N(C)C)CC1=CC=CC=C1 UHFFVFAKEGKNAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PGMMQIGGQSIEGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-ethenyl-1,3-oxazole Chemical compound C=CC1=NC=CO1 PGMMQIGGQSIEGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FWWXYLGCHHIKNY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-ethoxyethyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCOCCOC(=O)C=C FWWXYLGCHHIKNY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LRRQSCPPOIUNGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-hydroxy-1,2-bis(4-methoxyphenyl)ethanone Chemical compound C1=CC(OC)=CC=C1C(O)C(=O)C1=CC=C(OC)C=C1 LRRQSCPPOIUNGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BQZJOQXSCSZQPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methoxy-1,2-diphenylethanone Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C(OC)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 BQZJOQXSCSZQPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004200 2-methoxyethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])OC([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- RIWRBSMFKVOJMN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methyl-1-phenylpropan-2-ol Chemical compound CC(C)(O)CC1=CC=CC=C1 RIWRBSMFKVOJMN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NCTBYWFEJFTVEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methylbutyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCC(C)COC(=O)C=C NCTBYWFEJFTVEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LWZNQGJGMBRAII-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methylhexyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCCC(C)COC(=O)C=C LWZNQGJGMBRAII-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CEXQWAAGPPNOQF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-phenoxyethyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(=C)C(=O)OCCOC1=CC=CC=C1 CEXQWAAGPPNOQF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RZVINYQDSSQUKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-phenoxyethyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCCOC1=CC=CC=C1 RZVINYQDSSQUKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AGBXYHCHUYARJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-phenylethenesulfonic acid Chemical compound OS(=O)(=O)C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 AGBXYHCHUYARJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HPSGLFKWHYAKSF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-phenylethyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCCC1=CC=CC=C1 HPSGLFKWHYAKSF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KUDUQBURMYMBIJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-prop-2-enoyloxyethyl prop-2-enoate Chemical group C=CC(=O)OCCOC(=O)C=C KUDUQBURMYMBIJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LQJBNNIYVWPHFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 20:1omega9c fatty acid Natural products CCCCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(O)=O LQJBNNIYVWPHFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VLRGXXKFHVJQOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-chloropentane-2,4-dione Chemical compound CC(=O)C(Cl)C(C)=O VLRGXXKFHVJQOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZVYGIPWYVVJFRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methylbutyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)CCOC(=O)C=C ZVYGIPWYVVJFRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GFLJTEHFZZNCTR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-prop-2-enoyloxypropyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCCCOC(=O)C=C GFLJTEHFZZNCTR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SXIFAEWFOJETOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-hydroxy-butyl Chemical group [CH2]CCCO SXIFAEWFOJETOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BVDBXCXQMHBGQM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-methylpentan-2-yl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)CC(C)OC(=O)C=C BVDBXCXQMHBGQM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JHWGFJBTMHEZME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-prop-2-enoyloxybutyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCCCCOC(=O)C=C JHWGFJBTMHEZME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FIHBHSQYSYVZQE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-prop-2-enoyloxyhexyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCCCCCCOC(=O)C=C FIHBHSQYSYVZQE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CUXGDKOCSSIRKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7-methyloctyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)CCCCCCOC(=O)C=C CUXGDKOCSSIRKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LVGFPWDANALGOY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 8-methylnonyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)CCCCCCCOC(=O)C=C LVGFPWDANALGOY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QSBYPNXLFMSGKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-Heptadecensaeure Natural products CCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(O)=O QSBYPNXLFMSGKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KWOLFJPFCHCOCG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetophenone Natural products CC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 KWOLFJPFCHCOCG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000006596 Alder-ene reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-O Ammonium Chemical compound [NH4+] QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-O 0.000 description 1
- 229920002799 BoPET Polymers 0.000 description 1
- DKPFZGUDAPQIHT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butyl acetate Natural products CCCCOC(C)=O DKPFZGUDAPQIHT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BFMSYEWGLDJXDU-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCN(CC)C(SC(C(c1ccccc1)=O)SC(N(CC)CC)=S)=S Chemical compound CCN(CC)C(SC(C(c1ccccc1)=O)SC(N(CC)CC)=S)=S BFMSYEWGLDJXDU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GAWIXWVDTYZWAW-UHFFFAOYSA-N C[CH]O Chemical group C[CH]O GAWIXWVDTYZWAW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920002284 Cellulose triacetate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- SJIXRGNQPBQWMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N DEAEMA Natural products CCN(CC)CCOC(=O)C(C)=C SJIXRGNQPBQWMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RWSOTUBLDIXVET-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dihydrogen sulfide Chemical class S RWSOTUBLDIXVET-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XTHFKEDIFFGKHM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethoxyethane Chemical compound COCCOC XTHFKEDIFFGKHM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004593 Epoxy Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZZSNKZQZMQGXPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethyl cellulose Chemical compound CCOCC1OC(OC)C(OCC)C(OCC)C1OC1C(O)C(O)C(OC)C(CO)O1 ZZSNKZQZMQGXPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000001856 Ethyl cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M Ilexoside XXIX Chemical compound C[C@@H]1CC[C@@]2(CC[C@@]3(C(=CC[C@H]4[C@]3(CC[C@@H]5[C@@]4(CC[C@@H](C5(C)C)OS(=O)(=O)[O-])C)C)[C@@H]2[C@]1(C)O)C)C(=O)O[C@H]6[C@@H]([C@H]([C@@H]([C@H](O6)CO)O)O)O.[Na+] DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M 0.000 description 1
- NTIZESTWPVYFNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl isobutyl ketone Chemical compound CC(C)CC(C)=O NTIZESTWPVYFNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UIHCLUNTQKBZGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl isobutyl ketone Natural products CCC(C)C(C)=O UIHCLUNTQKBZGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VVQNEPGJFQJSBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl methacrylate Chemical compound COC(=O)C(C)=C VVQNEPGJFQJSBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BZLVMXJERCGZMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl tert-butyl ether Chemical compound COC(C)(C)C BZLVMXJERCGZMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000006845 Michael addition reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001730 Moisture cure polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000012565 NMR experiment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000005642 Oleic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Oleic acid Natural products CCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(O)=O ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CBENFWSGALASAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ozone Chemical compound [O-][O+]=O CBENFWSGALASAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phenol Chemical compound OC1=CC=CC=C1 ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002202 Polyethylene glycol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 1
- OFOBLEOULBTSOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Propanedioic acid Natural products OC(=O)CC(O)=O OFOBLEOULBTSOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XBDQKXXYIPTUBI-UHFFFAOYSA-M Propionate Chemical compound CCC([O-])=O XBDQKXXYIPTUBI-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- WTARULDDTDQWMU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pseudopinene Natural products C1C2C(C)(C)C1CCC2=C WTARULDDTDQWMU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108091092920 SmY RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241001237710 Smyrna Species 0.000 description 1
- KEAYESYHFKHZAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sodium Chemical compound [Na] KEAYESYHFKHZAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000007983 Tris buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- QYKIQEUNHZKYBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Vinyl ether Chemical class C=COC=C QYKIQEUNHZKYBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NNLVGZFZQQXQNW-ADJNRHBOSA-N [(2r,3r,4s,5r,6s)-4,5-diacetyloxy-3-[(2s,3r,4s,5r,6r)-3,4,5-triacetyloxy-6-(acetyloxymethyl)oxan-2-yl]oxy-6-[(2r,3r,4s,5r,6s)-4,5,6-triacetyloxy-2-(acetyloxymethyl)oxan-3-yl]oxyoxan-2-yl]methyl acetate Chemical compound O([C@@H]1O[C@@H]([C@H]([C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H]1OC(C)=O)O[C@H]1[C@@H]([C@@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@@H](COC(C)=O)O1)OC(C)=O)COC(=O)C)[C@@H]1[C@@H](COC(C)=O)O[C@@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H]1OC(C)=O NNLVGZFZQQXQNW-ADJNRHBOSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FHKPLLOSJHHKNU-INIZCTEOSA-N [(3S)-3-[8-(1-ethyl-5-methylpyrazol-4-yl)-9-methylpurin-6-yl]oxypyrrolidin-1-yl]-(oxan-4-yl)methanone Chemical compound C(C)N1N=CC(=C1C)C=1N(C2=NC=NC(=C2N=1)O[C@@H]1CN(CC1)C(=O)C1CCOCC1)C FHKPLLOSJHHKNU-INIZCTEOSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XRMBQHTWUBGQDN-UHFFFAOYSA-N [2-[2,2-bis(prop-2-enoyloxymethyl)butoxymethyl]-2-(prop-2-enoyloxymethyl)butyl] prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCC(COC(=O)C=C)(CC)COCC(CC)(COC(=O)C=C)COC(=O)C=C XRMBQHTWUBGQDN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KNSXNCFKSZZHEA-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-prop-2-enoyloxy-2,2-bis(prop-2-enoyloxymethyl)propyl] prop-2-enoate Chemical class C=CC(=O)OCC(COC(=O)C=C)(COC(=O)C=C)COC(=O)C=C KNSXNCFKSZZHEA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FHLPGTXWCFQMIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N [4-[2-(4-prop-2-enoyloxyphenyl)propan-2-yl]phenyl] prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=1C=C(OC(=O)C=C)C=CC=1C(C)(C)C1=CC=C(OC(=O)C=C)C=C1 FHLPGTXWCFQMIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GUCYFKSBFREPBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N [phenyl-(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)phosphoryl]-(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)methanone Chemical compound CC1=CC(C)=CC(C)=C1C(=O)P(=O)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)C1=C(C)C=C(C)C=C1C GUCYFKSBFREPBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005299 abrasion Methods 0.000 description 1
- KXKVLQRXCPHEJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetic acid trimethyl ester Natural products COC(C)=O KXKVLQRXCPHEJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001253 acrylic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012790 adhesive layer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000001931 aliphatic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229910052783 alkali metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001340 alkali metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001336 alkenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003302 alkenyloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000004703 alkoxides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000005250 alkyl acrylate group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- XCPQUQHBVVXMRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-Fenchene Natural products C1CC2C(=C)CC1C2(C)C XCPQUQHBVVXMRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XYLMUPLGERFSHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-Methylstyrene Chemical compound CC(=C)C1=CC=CC=C1 XYLMUPLGERFSHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZIXLDMFVRPABBX-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-methylcyclopentanone Natural products CC1CCCC1=O ZIXLDMFVRPABBX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MVNCAPSFBDBCGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-pinene Natural products CC1=CCC23C1CC2C3(C)C MVNCAPSFBDBCGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007098 aminolysis reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000004397 aminosulfonyl group Chemical group NS(=O)(=O)* 0.000 description 1
- 229910021529 ammonia Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001601 aromatic carbocyclic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000004945 aromatic hydrocarbons Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 1
- RWCCWEUUXYIKHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzophenone Chemical group C=1C=CC=CC=1C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 RWCCWEUUXYIKHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003236 benzoyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- AOJOEFVRHOZDFN-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(=C)C(=O)OCC1=CC=CC=C1 AOJOEFVRHOZDFN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GCTPMLUUWLLESL-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCC1=CC=CC=C1 GCTPMLUUWLLESL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229930006722 beta-pinene Natural products 0.000 description 1
- MQDJYUACMFCOFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N bis[2-(1-hydroxycyclohexyl)phenyl]methanone Chemical compound C=1C=CC=C(C(=O)C=2C(=CC=CC=2)C2(O)CCCCC2)C=1C1(O)CCCCC1 MQDJYUACMFCOFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001246 bromo group Chemical group Br* 0.000 description 1
- 238000011088 calibration curve Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000000609 carbazolyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC=2C3=CC=CC=C3NC12)* 0.000 description 1
- 150000001735 carboxylic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000002091 cationic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229920002301 cellulose acetate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910010293 ceramic material Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000001309 chloro group Chemical group Cl* 0.000 description 1
- 238000004587 chromatography analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- HNEGQIOMVPPMNR-IHWYPQMZSA-N citraconic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(/C)=C\C(O)=O HNEGQIOMVPPMNR-IHWYPQMZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940018557 citraconic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000011247 coating layer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010924 continuous production Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003851 corona treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003431 cross linking reagent Substances 0.000 description 1
- LDHQCZJRKDOVOX-NSCUHMNNSA-N crotonic acid Chemical compound C\C=C\C(O)=O LDHQCZJRKDOVOX-NSCUHMNNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OIWOHHBRDFKZNC-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(=C)C(=O)OC1CCCCC1 OIWOHHBRDFKZNC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KBLWLMPSVYBVDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OC1CCCCC1 KBLWLMPSVYBVDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BGTOWKSIORTVQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclopentanone Chemical compound O=C1CCCC1 BGTOWKSIORTVQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000009849 deactivation Effects 0.000 description 1
- GTBGXKPAKVYEKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N decyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)C(C)=C GTBGXKPAKVYEKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FWLDHHJLVGRRHD-UHFFFAOYSA-N decyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)C=C FWLDHHJLVGRRHD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AQEFLFZSWDEAIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N di-tert-butyl ether Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OC(C)(C)C AQEFLFZSWDEAIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000359 diblock copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000007607 die coating method Methods 0.000 description 1
- SBZXBUIDTXKZTM-UHFFFAOYSA-N diglyme Chemical compound COCCOCCOC SBZXBUIDTXKZTM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000003618 dip coating Methods 0.000 description 1
- POLCUAVZOMRGSN-UHFFFAOYSA-N dipropyl ether Chemical compound CCCOCCC POLCUAVZOMRGSN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GMSCBRSQMRDRCD-UHFFFAOYSA-N dodecyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)C(C)=C GMSCBRSQMRDRCD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003480 eluent Substances 0.000 description 1
- CCGKOQOJPYTBIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethenone Chemical compound C=C=O CCGKOQOJPYTBIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IGBZOHMCHDADGY-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethenyl 2-ethylhexanoate Chemical compound CCCCC(CC)C(=O)OC=C IGBZOHMCHDADGY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- TVFJAZCVMOXQRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethenyl 7,7-dimethyloctanoate Chemical compound CC(C)(C)CCCCCC(=O)OC=C TVFJAZCVMOXQRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UIWXSTHGICQLQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethenyl propanoate Chemical compound CCC(=O)OC=C UIWXSTHGICQLQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SUPCQIBBMFXVTL-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)C(C)=C SUPCQIBBMFXVTL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FKIRSCKRJJUCNI-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl 7-bromo-1h-indole-2-carboxylate Chemical compound C1=CC(Br)=C2NC(C(=O)OCC)=CC2=C1 FKIRSCKRJJUCNI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920001249 ethyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000019325 ethyl cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000001495 ethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001125 extrusion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004744 fabric Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 1
- NBVXSUQYWXRMNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluoromethane Chemical compound FC NBVXSUQYWXRMNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011888 foil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001530 fumaric acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004927 fusion Effects 0.000 description 1
- LCWMKIHBLJLORW-UHFFFAOYSA-N gamma-carene Natural products C1CC(=C)CC2C(C)(C)C21 LCWMKIHBLJLORW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000499 gel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000003055 glycidyl group Chemical group C(C1CO1)* 0.000 description 1
- 238000004340 gradient COSY Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000001188 haloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- FUZZWVXGSFPDMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCCC(O)=O FUZZWVXGSFPDMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LNMQRPPRQDGUDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCCCCOC(=O)C=C LNMQRPPRQDGUDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000002883 imidazolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000001041 indolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002346 iodo group Chemical group I* 0.000 description 1
- 125000000959 isobutyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 150000002513 isocyanates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- QXJSBBXBKPUZAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N isooleic acid Natural products CCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCCC(O)=O QXJSBBXBKPUZAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000555 isopropenyl group Chemical group [H]\C([H])=C(\*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000001449 isopropyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 239000002655 kraft paper Substances 0.000 description 1
- PBOSTUDLECTMNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N lauryl acrylate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)C=C PBOSTUDLECTMNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000001510 limonene Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940087305 limonene Drugs 0.000 description 1
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UPHRSURJSA-N maleic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)\C=C/C(O)=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UPHRSURJSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011976 maleic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 1
- QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N mercury Chemical compound [Hg] QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052753 mercury Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FQPSGWSUVKBHSU-UHFFFAOYSA-N methacrylamide Chemical compound CC(=C)C(N)=O FQPSGWSUVKBHSU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LVHBHZANLOWSRM-UHFFFAOYSA-N methylenebutanedioic acid Natural products OC(=O)CC(=C)C(O)=O LVHBHZANLOWSRM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- OPECTNGATDYLSS-UHFFFAOYSA-N naphthalene-2-sulfonyl chloride Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC(S(=O)(=O)Cl)=CC=C21 OPECTNGATDYLSS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012038 nucleophile Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007344 nucleophilic reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- FSAJWMJJORKPKS-UHFFFAOYSA-N octadecyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)C=C FSAJWMJJORKPKS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ANISOHQJBAQUQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N octyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCOC(=O)C=C ANISOHQJBAQUQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-KTKRTIGZSA-N oleic acid Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-KTKRTIGZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- ULDDEWDFUNBUCM-UHFFFAOYSA-N pentyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCCCOC(=O)C=C ULDDEWDFUNBUCM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000002978 peroxides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000003208 petroleum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005191 phase separation Methods 0.000 description 1
- IMACFCSSMIZSPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenacyl chloride Chemical compound ClCC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 IMACFCSSMIZSPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WRAQQYDMVSCOTE-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OC1=CC=CC=C1 WRAQQYDMVSCOTE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003009 phosphonic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- HZLFQUWNZMMHQM-UHFFFAOYSA-N piperazin-1-ylmethanol Chemical compound OCN1CCNCC1 HZLFQUWNZMMHQM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003386 piperidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229920001084 poly(chloroprene) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920003207 poly(ethylene-2,6-naphthalate) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001200 poly(ethylene-vinyl acetate) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000728 polyester Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000011112 polyethylene naphthalate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000098 polyolefin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920005606 polypropylene copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920005650 polypropylene glycol diacrylate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002223 polystyrene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001343 polytetrafluoroethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004810 polytetrafluoroethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002689 polyvinyl acetate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000915 polyvinyl chloride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- YIBBMDDEXKBIAM-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium;pentoxymethanedithioate Chemical compound [K+].CCCCCOC([S-])=S YIBBMDDEXKBIAM-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- ZMWBGRXFDPJFGC-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium;propan-2-yloxymethanedithioate Chemical compound [K+].CC(C)OC([S-])=S ZMWBGRXFDPJFGC-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001902 propagating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- BOQSSGDQNWEFSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N propan-2-yl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)OC(=O)C(C)=C BOQSSGDQNWEFSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NHARPDSAXCBDDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N propyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCOC(=O)C(C)=C NHARPDSAXCBDDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003226 pyrazolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000007348 radical reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000035484 reaction time Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006894 reductive elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012712 reversible addition−fragmentation chain-transfer polymerization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000006413 ring segment Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000012488 sample solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002002 slurry Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052708 sodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011734 sodium Substances 0.000 description 1
- RZFBEFUNINJXRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium ethyl xanthate Chemical compound [Na+].CCOC([S-])=S RZFBEFUNINJXRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 238000005507 spraying Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000004079 stearyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 150000003440 styrenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000000446 sulfanediyl group Chemical group *S* 0.000 description 1
- 150000003460 sulfonic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000002194 synthesizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010345 tape casting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003505 terpenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000007586 terpenes Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000000999 tert-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(*)(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 238000001551 total correlation spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- LDHQCZJRKDOVOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N trans-crotonic acid Natural products CC=CC(O)=O LDHQCZJRKDOVOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000011282 treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000005208 trialkylammonium group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229920000428 triblock copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001567 vinyl ester resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- ZTWTYVWXUKTLCP-UHFFFAOYSA-N vinylphosphonic acid Chemical compound OP(O)(=O)C=C ZTWTYVWXUKTLCP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005303 weighing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012991 xanthate Substances 0.000 description 1
- PAPBSGBWRJIAAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N ε-Caprolactone Chemical class O=C1CCCCCO1 PAPBSGBWRJIAAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08K—Use of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
- C08K5/00—Use of organic ingredients
- C08K5/36—Sulfur-, selenium-, or tellurium-containing compounds
- C08K5/39—Thiocarbamic acids; Derivatives thereof, e.g. dithiocarbamates
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F2/00—Processes of polymerisation
- C08F2/38—Polymerisation using regulators, e.g. chain terminating agents, e.g. telomerisation
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F2/00—Processes of polymerisation
- C08F2/46—Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation
- C08F2/48—Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation by ultraviolet or visible light
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F2/00—Processes of polymerisation
- C08F2/46—Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation
- C08F2/48—Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation by ultraviolet or visible light
- C08F2/50—Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation by ultraviolet or visible light with sensitising agents
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F220/00—Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
- C08F220/02—Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms; Derivatives thereof
- C08F220/10—Esters
- C08F220/12—Esters of monohydric alcohols or phenols
- C08F220/16—Esters of monohydric alcohols or phenols of phenols or of alcohols containing two or more carbon atoms
- C08F220/18—Esters of monohydric alcohols or phenols of phenols or of alcohols containing two or more carbon atoms with acrylic or methacrylic acids
- C08F220/1802—C2-(meth)acrylate, e.g. ethyl (meth)acrylate
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F220/00—Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
- C08F220/02—Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms; Derivatives thereof
- C08F220/10—Esters
- C08F220/12—Esters of monohydric alcohols or phenols
- C08F220/16—Esters of monohydric alcohols or phenols of phenols or of alcohols containing two or more carbon atoms
- C08F220/18—Esters of monohydric alcohols or phenols of phenols or of alcohols containing two or more carbon atoms with acrylic or methacrylic acids
- C08F220/1808—C8-(meth)acrylate, e.g. isooctyl (meth)acrylate or 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F236/00—Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, at least one having two or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds
- C08F236/02—Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, at least one having two or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds the radical having only two carbon-to-carbon double bonds
- C08F236/20—Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, at least one having two or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds the radical having only two carbon-to-carbon double bonds unconjugated
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09J—ADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
- C09J4/00—Adhesives based on organic non-macromolecular compounds having at least one polymerisable carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond ; adhesives, based on monomers of macromolecular compounds of groups C09J183/00 - C09J183/16
- C09J4/06—Organic non-macromolecular compounds having at least one polymerisable carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond in combination with a macromolecular compound other than an unsaturated polymer of groups C09J159/00 - C09J187/00
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F120/00—Homopolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride, ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
- C08F120/02—Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms; Derivatives thereof
- C08F120/10—Esters
- C08F120/12—Esters of monohydric alcohols or phenols
- C08F120/16—Esters of monohydric alcohols or phenols of phenols or of alcohols containing two or more carbon atoms
- C08F120/18—Esters of monohydric alcohols or phenols of phenols or of alcohols containing two or more carbon atoms with acrylic or methacrylic acids
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F2438/00—Living radical polymerisation
- C08F2438/03—Use of a di- or tri-thiocarbonylthio compound, e.g. di- or tri-thioester, di- or tri-thiocarbamate, or a xanthate as chain transfer agent, e.g . Reversible Addition Fragmentation chain Transfer [RAFT] or Macromolecular Design via Interchange of Xanthates [MADIX]
Definitions
- Controlled radical initiators and polymeric materials formed using controlled radical initiators are provided.
- polymeric materials are determined not only by their composition but also by their molecular architecture.
- various properties such as melt viscosity, glass transition temperature, and modulus are often a function of the distribution of the different monomeric units along the polymeric chain.
- Conventional radical polymerization methods have limited utility in synthesizing polymers with precise architectural and structural characteristics.
- Controlled radical polymerization methods have been developed that allow the preparation of polymers with well-defined molecular weight, polydispersity, topology, composition, and
- microstructure These methods are based on the use of special polymerization mediators, which temporarily and reversibly transform propagating radicals into dormant and/or stable species. These reversible transformations are typically either accomplished by reversible deactivation or by reversible chain transfer.
- Some of the methods that involve controlled radical polymerization through reversible transformations include iniferter methods, nitroxide mediated polymerization (NMP) methods, atom transfer polymerization (ATRP) methods, and reversible addition-fragmentation (RAFT) methods.
- iniferter and“photoiniferters” refer to molecules that can act as an initiator, chain transfer agent, and terminator. Various iniferters were discussed in Otsu et al., Makromol. Chem., Rapid Commun., 3, 127-132 (1982).
- the compound p-xylene bis(N,N-diethyldithiocarbamate) (XDC) has been used to form various acrylic-based block copolymers such as those described in European Patent Applications 0286376 A2 (Otsu et al.) and 0349270 A2 (Mahfuza et al.).
- Some polymeric materials have been formed by applying a layer of a crosslinkable composition to the surface of a substrate.
- the crosslinkable composition can contain a pre-polymer plus additional monomers and a crosslinking agent.
- Crosslinked compositions can be prepared by exposing the crosslinkable composition to actinic radiation such as ultraviolet radiation.
- Patents 4,181,752 (Martens et al.), 4,330,590 (Vesley), 4,329,384 (Vesley et ah), 4,379,201 (Heilmann et ah), 5,506,279 (Babu et al.), 5,773,836 (Bennett et al.), and 5,773,485 (Bennett et al.).
- Controlled radical initiators reaction mixtures containing the controlled radical initiators and various ethylenically unsaturated monomers, polymeric materials formed from the reaction mixtures, crosslinkable compositions containing the polymeric materials, crosslinked compositions formed from the crosslinkable compositions, and articles containing the polymeric materials, the crosslinkable compositions, or the crosslinked compositions are provided.
- the controlled radical initiators are bis- dithiocarbamate or bis-dithiocarbonate compounds having a single carbon between the two
- dithiocarbamate or dithiocarbonate groups are also attached to that single carbon. Also attached to that single carbon is a ketone group.
- a first reaction mixture in a first aspect, includes a) a photoinitiator of Formula (I)
- group R 1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R 3 )2.
- group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or a combination thereof.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- a polymeric material of Formula (II) is provided.
- group R 1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R 3 )2.
- Group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or a combination thereof.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- Each P is a polymeric block that comprises a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the variables y and z refer to the number of polymeric blocks.
- the variable y is an integer in a range of 1 to 10
- the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to y ⁇
- a crosslinkable composition contains a) a polymeric material of Formula (II) as described above in the second aspect and b) a second monomer composition comprising a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups.
- a crosslinked composition in a fourth aspect, includes a cured product of a crosslinkable composition.
- the crosslinkable composition is the same as described above in the third aspect.
- an article in a fifth aspect, includes a first substrate and a polymeric material layer positioned adjacent to the first substrate.
- the polymeric material is of Formula (II) as described above in the second aspect.
- an article in a sixth aspect, includes a first substrate and a crosslinkable composition layer adjacent to the first substrate.
- the crosslinkable composition layer contains the crosslinkable composition described above in the third aspect.
- another article in a seventh aspect, includes a first substrate and a crosslinked composition layer adjacent to the first substrate.
- the crosslinked composition layer contains the crosslinked composition described above in the fourth aspect.
- a compound is provided.
- the compound is of Formula (I-B) and can function as a photoinitiator.
- group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or combination thereof.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- a compound is provided.
- the compound is of Formula (I-C) and can function as a photoinitiator.
- group -OR 10 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy.
- Group R 20 is an alkyl.
- FIG. 1 shows the aromatic region of the 'H NMR spectrum for Example 11 after 6 percent conversion (i.e., polymerization) of the monomer.
- Controlled radical initiators reaction mixtures containing the controlled radical initiators and various ethylenically unsaturated monomers, polymeric materials formed from the reaction mixtures, crosslinkable compositions containing the polymeric materials, crosslinked compositions formed from the crosslinkable compositions, and various articles are provided.
- the controlled radical initiators are bis-dithiocarbamate or bis-dithiocarbonate compounds having a single carbon between the two dithiocarbamate or dithiocarbonate groups. Also attached to that single carbon is a ketone group.
- the controlled radical initiator compounds can be referred to as iniferters because they can function as a controlled radical initiator, transfer agent, and terminator.
- the controlled radical initiators can be referred to as photoinitiators or photoiniferters because the controlled radical polymerization reaction typically is photolytically induced.
- the resulting polymeric material formed from the controlled radical initiators have terminal dithiocarbamate or dithiocarbonate groups.
- the polymeric materials having well controlled architectures can be formed using these photoinitiator compounds.
- the polymeric materials can be homopolymers, random copolymers, or block copolymers.
- Crosslinkable compositions can be prepared that contain the polymeric materials and a monomer composition that includes a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups. When the crosslinkable composition is exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet region of the electromagnetic spectrum), the polymeric material undergoes chain extension and crosslinking reactions.
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet region of the electromagnetic spectrum
- “and/or” means either or both.
- “A and/or B” means only A, only B, or both A and B.
- polymer and“polymeric material” are used interchangeably and refer to materials formed by reacting one or more monomers.
- the terms include homopolymers, copolymers, terpolymers, or the like.
- polymerize and“polymerizing” refer to the process of making a polymeric material that can be a homopolymer, copolymer, terpolymer, or the like.
- alkyl refers to a monovalent group that is a radical of an alkane.
- the alkyl group can have 1 to 32 carbon atoms, 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl can be linear, branched, cyclic, or a combination thereof.
- a linear alkyl has at least one carbon atoms while a cyclic or branched alkyl has at least 3 carbon atoms. In some embodiments, if there are greater than 12 carbon atoms, the alkyl is branched.
- alkoxy refers to a monovalent group of formula -OR a where R a is an alkyl as defined above.
- alkylene refers to a divalent group that is a radical of an alkane.
- the alkylene group can have 1 to 32 carbon atoms, 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- the alkylene can be linear, branched, cyclic, or a combination thereof.
- a linear alkylene has at least one carbon atoms while a cyclic or branched alkylene has at least 3 carbon atoms. In some embodiments, if there are greater than 12 carbon atoms, the alkyl is branched.
- aryl refers to a monovalent group that is a radical of an aromatic carbocyclic compound.
- the aryl group has at least one aromatic carbocyclic ring and can have 1 to 5 optional rings that are connected to or fused to the aromatic carbocyclic ring.
- the additional rings can be aromatic, aliphatic, or a combination thereof.
- the aryl group usually has 5 to 20 carbon atoms or 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- substituted aryl refers to an aryl group substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or combination thereof.
- the aryl is the same as defined above.
- the alkyl and alkoxy groups are the same as defined above and the halo is selected from chloro, bromo, iodo, or fluoro.
- the term“combination” means that the aryl can be substituted with multiple different types of substituent groups.
- combination means the aryl can be substituted with an alkyl or alkoxy that is further substituted with a halo.
- aryloxy refers to a monovalent group that is of formula -O-Ar where Ar is an aryl group as defined above.
- aralkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with at least one aryl group. That is, the aralkyl group is of formula -R d -Ar where R d is an alkylene and Ar is an aryl.
- the aralkyl group contains 6 to 40 carbon atoms.
- the aralkyl group often contains an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or 1 to 10 carbon atoms and an aryl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms or 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- aralkyloxy refers to a monovalent group of formula -0-R d -Ar where R d and Ar are defined above for an aralkyl.
- alkenyl refers to a monovalent group that is a radical of an alkene, which is a compound having at least one carbon-carbon double bond. In some embodiments, the alkenyl has a single carbon-carbon double bond. In some more specific embodiments, the alkenyl has a terminal ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the alkenyl can be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkenyl has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, or 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
- alkenyloxy refers to a monovalent group of formula -OR b where R b is an alkenyl as defined above.
- heteroalkyl refers to an alkyl group where at least one of the catenated carbon atoms is replaced with oxy, thio, or -NH-.
- heterocyclic ring refers to a ring structure having at least 1 heteroatom selected from oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur, wherein the ring structure is saturated or unsaturated.
- the heterocyclic ring typically has 5 to 7 ring atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms.
- the heterocyclic ring can optionally be fused to one or more additional rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic and that can be saturated or unsaturated. Any of the rings can optionally be substituted with an alkyl group.
- ketone group refers to a group -(CO)-R 2 where R 2 is an alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl.
- (meth)acrylate refers to an acrylate, a methacrylate, or both.
- (meth)acrylamide refers to an acrylamide, a methacrylamide, or both and the term“(meth)acrylic acid” refers to acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, or both.
- polymeric materials are formed from a reaction mixture that includes both (a) a photoinitiator of Formula (I) and (b) a monomer composition containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. Upon exposure to actinic radiation in the ultraviolet region of the electromagnetic spectrum, a polymerization reaction commences.
- group R 1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R 3 )2.
- Group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or combination thereof.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- each R 1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy.
- photoinitiators are of Formula (I-A) where -OR 10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy (i.e., R 10 is an alkyl, aralkyl, or alkenyl).
- photoinitiators are bis-dithiocarbonate compounds having a single carbon atom between the two dithiocarbonate groups.
- Suitable alkoxy groups for R 1 of Formula (I) and for -OR 10 of Formula (I -A) typically have at least 1 carbon atom, at least 2 carbon atoms, at least 3 carbon atoms, or at least 4 carbon atoms and can have up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, or up to 10 carbon atoms.
- alkoxy groups have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, 2 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- Suitable aralkyloxy groups for R 1 and for -OR 10 typically contains an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms and an aryl group having 5 to 12 carbon atoms, 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the aryl group in the aralkyloxy group is often phenyl.
- Suitable alkenoxy groups for R 1 and for -OR 10 typically have at least 2 carbon atoms, at least 3 carbon atoms, or at least 4 carbon atoms and can have up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, up to 10 carbon atoms, or up to 6 carbons.
- Some example alkenoxy groups have 2 to 20 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, 2 to 8 carbon atoms, 2 to 6 carbon atoms, or 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
- R 10 in Formula (I-A) is an alkyl (i.e., group -OR 10 is an alkoxy in Formula (I-A) corresponds to group R 1 is an alkoxy in Formula (I)).
- Some more specific photoinitiators of Formula (I-A) are of Formula (I-C).
- group -OR 10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy (i.e., R 10 is an alkyl, aralkyl, or alkenyl). Suitable alkoxy, aralkyloxy, and alkenoxy groups are the same as described above for Formulas (I) and (I-A).
- Group R 20 is an alkyl. Suitable alkyl groups for R 20 typically have at least 1 carbon atom, at least 2 carbon atoms, at least 3 carbon atoms, or at least 4 carbon atoms and can have up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, or up to 10 carbon atoms.
- alkyl groups have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, 2 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- -OR 10 is an alkoxy (i.e., R 10 is an alkyl).
- group R 1 is of formula -N(R 3 )2.
- Such photoinitiators are of Formula (I-B).
- photoinitiators are bis-dithiocarbamate compounds having a single carbon atom between the two dithiocarbonate groups.
- Each R 3 in Formula (I) and Formula (I-B) is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having at least one heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated (e.g., partially or fully unsaturated) and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- Suitable alkyl groups typically have at least 1 carbon atom, at least 2 carbon atoms, at least 3 carbon atoms, or at least 4 carbon atoms and can have up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, or up to 10 carbon atoms.
- Some example alkyl groups have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, 2 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- the heterocyclic ring typically has a first ring structure with 5 to 7 ring members or 5 to 6 ring members and with 1 to 3 heteroatoms or 1 to 2 heteroatoms in the ring. If there is one heteroatom in the first ring structure, the heteroatom is nitrogen. If there are two or three heteroatoms in the first ring structure, one heteroatom is nitrogen and any additional heteroatom is selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
- the first ring optionally can be fused to one or more second ring structures that are heterocyclic or carbocyclic and saturated or unsaturated (e.g., partially or fully unsaturated).
- the second ring structure is heterocyclic, it typically has 5 to 7 or 5 to 6 ring members and 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. If the second ring structure is carbocyclic, it is often benzene or a saturated ring having 5 or 6 ring members.
- the heterocyclic ring has a single ring structure with 5 or 6 ring members and with either 1 or 2 heteroatoms in the ring. Examples of heterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to, morpholino, thiomorpholino, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, homo-piperidinyl, indolyl, carbazolyl, imidazolyl, and pyrazolyl.
- R 3 is an alkyl.
- Group R 2 in Formula (I) is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or a combination thereof.
- R 2 is an alkyl
- the alkyl group typically has at least 1 carbon atom, at least 2 carbon atoms, at least 3 carbon atoms, or at least 4 carbon atoms and can have up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, or up to 10 carbon atoms.
- alkyl groups have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, 2 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- R 2 is an aryl or a substituted aryl
- the aryl often has 5 to 12 carbon atoms, 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the aryl is often phenyl.
- Alkyl or alkoxy groups that are substituents of the aryl group typically have 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- Halo groups that are substituents of the aryl group typically are bromo, chloro, fluoro, or iodo.
- a combination of the substituents means that the aryl is substituted with two substituents and they are not of the same type.
- the listed substituents can be combined together into a single substituent.
- a combined substituent can be a halo substituted alkyl or alkoxy group.
- R 2 is an aralkyl
- the aralkyl group often contains an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms and an aryl group having 5 to 12 carbon atoms, 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the aryl group in the aralkyl group is often phenyl.
- the photoinitiator compounds of Formula (I) can be formed by any suitable method. One suitable method is shown in Reaction Scheme A.
- a dihalo ketone compound (compound (4)) is reacted with a compound of formula R 1 -(CS)-S M + , which is compound (3) as shown in Reaction II.
- Compound (3) can be formed, for example, by treating a salt of formula (1) with carbon disulfide (Reaction I).
- Compound (1) is a salt of an alkoxide, aryloxide, or amine where M+ is an alkali metal, a tetralkyl ammonium ion, a trialkyl ammonium ion, or a dialkylammonium ion.
- Reaction I is often conducted at temperatures between about 0°C and about 80°C in the presence of an organic solvent such as acetone, acetonitrile, or an alcohol.
- the reaction (Reaction II) of compound (4) with compound (3) is typically conducted at temperatures between about 0°C and about 80°C in the presence of an organic solvent such as acetone, acetonitrile, or an alcohol.
- Examples of compound (3) include, but are not limited to, sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate and various xanthate salts such as potassium ethyl xanthate, sodium ethyl xanthate, potassium isopropyl xanthate, sodium isopropyl xanthate, and potassium amyl xanthate.
- the photoinitiator of Formula (I) (including those of Formulas (I-A), (I-B), and (I-C)) is mixed with one or more monomer compositions to form a polymeric materials of Formula (II).
- groups R 1 and R 2 are the same as defined for the photoinitiator of Formula (I).
- Each P is a polymeric block that includes a polymerized product of a monomer composition containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group
- y is an integer equal to at least 1 (e.g., in a range of 1 to 10, in a range of 1 to 5, or in a range of 1 to 3)
- z is an integer in a range of 0 to y. In many embodiments z is equal to y.
- the variable z and y refer to the number of polymeric blocks. That is, (P) y means that there are y polymeric blocks P and (P) z means that there are z polymeric blocks P.
- the molecular weight of each polymeric block can be the same or different.
- Each polymeric block P in Formula (II) is the polymerized product of a monomer composition containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. Any monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group can be used based on the desired properties of the resulting polymeric material. In some embodiments, all the monomers used to form any polymeric block P have a single (meth)acryloyl group. In other embodiments, all the monomers used to form any polymeric block P have a single ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group.
- all the monomers used to form any polymeric block P have a single ethylenically unsaturated group and some, but not all, of the ethylenically unsaturated groups are (meth)acryloyl groups.
- Each polymeric block can be a homopolymer or a copolymer. Any monomer can be used alone or in combination with other monomers to form each polymeric block.
- Suitable monomers with a single (meth)acryloyl group that can be used to form the polymeric material of Formula (II) include, but are not limited to, alkyl (meth)acrylates, fluorinated alkyl
- (meth)acrylates aryl (meth)acrylates, aralkyl (meth)acrylates, substituted aryl (meth)acrylates, (meth)acrylic acid, (meth)acrylamide, N-alkyl (meth)acrylamides, N,N-dialkyl (meth)acrylamides, N- alkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylates, N,N-dialkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylates, N-alkylaminoalkyl
- (meth)acrylates hydroxy-substituted alkyl (meth)acrylamides, alkoxylated alkyl (meth)acrylates, acid- substituted alkyl (meth)acrylates, acid-substituted alkyl (meth)acrylamides, glycidyl-containing (meth)acrylates, isocyanate-containing (meth)acrylates such as isocyanate-substituted alkyl
- (meth)acrylates aminosulfonyl-containing (meth)acrylates, cationic monomers such as N,N,N- trialkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylates, zwitterionic monomers (e.g., 2-(N-3-sulfopropyl-N,N- dimethylammonium)ethyl (meth)acrylate), and mixtures thereof.
- a plurality of different monomers having a single (meth)acryloyl group can be included in the monomer composition for any polymeric block.
- the reaction mixture used to form any block P in the polymeric material of Formula (II) includes a monomer composition containing a monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group.
- Suitable such monomers include, but are not limited to, N-vinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylcaprolactam, vinyl acetate, vinyl methyl ether, vinyl-2 - ethylhexanoate, vinyl neodecanoate, styrene, isoprene, butadiene, vinyl dimethylazlactone (VDM), isopropenyl dimethylazlactone (IDM), and vinyl oxazole, and the like.
- the variables y and z refer to the number of polymeric blocks P.
- the variable y is an integer equal to at least 1 (e.g., in a range of 1 to 10, in a range of 1 to 5, in a range of 1 to 3, or in a range of 1 to 2) and the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to y. If the variable y is equal to 1, the variable z is equal to 0 or 1. If z is equal to 0, then the resulting polymeric material has a mono- directional polymeric group. That is, there is a polymeric chain only on one side of the divalent group -CH[(CO)R 2 ]- in Formula (II). If z is equal to 1, then the resulting polymeric material has a bi directional polymeric group. That is, there is a polymeric group on both sides of the divalent group - CH[(CO)R 2 ]- in Formula (II).
- the polymeric material formed in the early stages of polymerization of the monomer composition results in the formation of a polymeric chain growing on one but not on both sides of the divalent group -CH[(CO)R 2 ]- in Formula (II). That is, the reaction product is predominately a polymeric material having y equal to 1 and z equal to 0.
- the reaction product includes a mixture of a first polymeric material having y equal to 1 and z equal to 0 (i.e., this first polymeric material can be referred to as a“mono-directional polymeric material”) and a second polymeric material having y equal to 1 and z equal to 1 (i.e., this second polymeric material can be referred to as a“bi-directional polymeric material”).
- this first polymeric material can be referred to as a“mono-directional polymeric material”
- a second polymeric material having y equal to 1 and z equal to 1
- this second polymeric material can be referred to as a“bi-directional polymeric material”.
- the percentage of the polymeric material that is bi-directional typically increases.
- the amount of bi-directional polymeric material is often at least 80 weight percent, at least 90 weight percent, or at least 95 weight percent based on the total weight of polymeric material (i.e., the mono-directional plus bi-directional polymeric material).
- Some polymeric materials of Formula (II) are formed from the photoinitiators of Formula (I-A) and are of Formula (II-A).
- group R 10 is the same as defined in Formula (I-A).
- Groups R 2 and P as well as the variables y and z are the same as defined in Formula (II).
- Some polymeric materials of Formula (II) are formed from the photoinitiators of Formula (I-C) and are of Formula (II-C).
- Some polymeric materials of Formula (II) are formed from the photoinitiators of Formula (I-B) and are of Formula (II -B).
- Reaction III the photoinitiator of Formula (I), which is shown as compound (10), undergoes photolysis of one of the C-S bonds when exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) (Reaction III).
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- Two different radicals, the radical (11) and the radical (12), are formed in Reaction III.
- Reaction IV radical (11) reacts with ethylenically unsaturated monomers (compound (13)). The monomers polymerize and radical (14) is formed.
- the radical (14) can combine with a radical (12) and the polymerization reaction is terminated.
- the resulting polymeric material of Reaction V is compound (15).
- Compound (15) corresponds to the polymeric material of Formula (II) where y is equal to 1 and z is equal to zero (i.e., there is polymeric material on only one side of the -CH[(CO)R 2 ]- group; the polymeric material is mono-directional).
- Compound (15) can undergo photolysis at one of the C-S bonds in the presence of actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation). Photolysis can result in the generation of radical (12) and radical (16) as shown in Reaction VI.
- Reaction VII radical (16) reacts with ethylenically unsaturated monomers (compound 13). The monomers polymerize and radical (17) is formed. The radical (17) can combine with radical (12) and the polymerization reaction is terminated.
- the resulting polymeric material formed in Reaction VIII is compound (18).
- Compound (18) corresponds to the polymeric material of Formula (II) where y is equal to 1 and z is equal to 1 (i.e., there is polymeric material on both sides of the -CH[(CO)R 2 ]- group; the polymeric material is bi-directional).
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- photolysis of compound (18) can occur and additional monomeric units can be added.
- no further photolysis can occur, and no additional monomeric units can be added.
- radical (14) combines with another molecule of compound (15) to generate radical (19).
- radical (19) undergoes homolysis of a carbon-sulfur bond to regenerate radical (14) and compound (15).
- radical (19) undergoes homolysis on the opposite side of the dithiocarbonate or dithiocarbamate group to generate compound (15) and radical (16), a net transfer of the dithiocarbonate or dithiocarbamate group.
- compound (13) is a monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. If the ethylenically unsaturated group is a (meth)acryloyl group, R x is hydrogen or methyl and R y includes a group -(CO)-X-R 11 .
- Group X is oxy or -NR 12 - where R 12 is hydrogen or alkyl.
- Group R x is hydrogen or methyl and group R 11 is the remainder, for example, of any (meth)acrylate or (meth)acrylamide monomer described herein.
- Polymeric materials of Formula (II) with y equal to 1 can be formed by mixing a photoinitiator of Formula (I) with a monomer composition 1A and exposing the resulting reaction mixture 1A to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet light).
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet light
- the actinic radiation exposure causes the photolysis of the photoinitiator and permits controlled radical polymerization of the monomer composition 1A to form a first polymeric block.
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet light
- the product of the first polymerization is a polymeric material of Formula (II- 1) where (P)i indicates that there is one polymeric block and (P)o-i indicates that there is zero to one polymeric blocks.
- the length of the polymeric chains P 1 on either side of the -CH[(CO)R 2 ]- group in the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1 A) can be the same or different.
- the photoinitiator can be mono-directional in terms of polymeric chain formation. This can be particularly the situation during the early stages of conversion.
- polymerization may occur on both sides of the -CH[(CO)R 2 ]- group. That is, the variable y is equal to 1 and the variable z is equal to 1 in the polymeric material of Formula (II) as shown in Formula (II-1A).
- the size e.g., the number average molecular weight
- the photoinitiator can be bi-directional in terms of polymeric chain formation. That is, there will be a polymeric block on both sides of the -CH[(CO)R 2 ]- group.
- the variable y is equal to 1 and the variable z is equal to 1 in the polymeric material of Formula (II). Even though there is a polymeric block on either side of the -CH[(CO)R 2 ]- group, the size (e.g., the number average molecular weight) of the two polymeric blocks can be the same or different.
- monomer composition 1B Another monomer composition, referred to as monomer composition 1B, can be added to the product of the reaction mixture 1A (i.e., the polymeric material of Formula (II-1A) and/or Formula (II- 1B)) to form a reaction mixture 1B.
- reaction mixture 1A i.e., the polymeric material of Formula (II-1A) and/or Formula (II- 1B)
- Monomer composition 1B can polymerize to form a second polymeric block P 2 attached to the end of any polymeric block P 1 in the polymeric material of Formula (II-1-1) or (II-1-2). When exposure to actinic radiation is terminated, the second polymerization reaction ceases.
- the product of the second polymerization is the polymeric material of Formula (II-2).
- the designation (P)2 indicates that there are two polymeric blocks and the designation (P)o-2 indicates that are 0 to 2 polymeric blocks.
- the number of polymeric blocks on each side of the -CH[(CO)R 2 ]- group in Formula (II-2) can be the same or different. That is, although there can be two blocks on one side of this group, there can be 0, 1 or 2 blocks on the other side. Stated differently, in Formula (II), y is 2 and z is 0, 1, or 2. If a polymeric block is on both sides of the -CH[(CO)R 2 ]- group, the size (e.g., number average molecular weight) of the polymeric blocks can be the same or different.
- both z and y are equal to 2 and the polymeric material is of formula (II-2A).
- P 1 refers to the first polymeric block and P 2 refers to the second polymeric block.
- the designation (P)3 indicates that there are three polymeric blocks (i.e., y is equal to 3 in Formula (II)) and the designation (P)o-3 indicates that there are 0 to 3 polymeric blocks (i.e., z is in a range of 0 to 3 in Formula (II)).
- both z and y are equal to 3 and the polymeric material is of formula (II-3A).
- P 1 refers to the first polymeric block
- P 2 refers to the second polymeric block
- P 3 refers to the third polymeric block.
- This ability to control the architecture of the resulting polymeric material is particularly advantageous when block copolymers are prepared.
- a polymeric material composition that is primarily a diblock copolymer, that is primarily a triblock copolymer, or a mixture thereof can be formed depending on the specific photoinitiator that is selected.
- Each polymeric block (e.g., P, P 1 , P 2 , or P 3 ) can have any desired molecular weight.
- the molecular weight of each block can be the same or different than any other polymeric block.
- the weight average molecular weight of any polymeric block is at least 1,000 Daltons, at least 2,000 Daltons, at least 5,000 Daltons, at least 10,000 Daltons, at least 20,000 Daltons, at least 50,000 Daltons, or at least 100,000 Daltons.
- the weight average molecular weight of any polymeric block can be up to 1 million Daltons or even higher, up to 750,000 Daltons, up to 500,000 Daltons, up to 200,000 Daltons, or up to 100,000 Daltons.
- the polymeric material of Formula (II) has an overall weight average molecular weight in a range of 10,000 Daltons to 5 million Daltons, in a range of 10,000 Daltons to 3 million Daltons, or in a range of 10,000 Daltons to 1 million Daltons.
- the first polymeric block P 1 is a polymerized product of a monomer composition 1A containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- P 2 is a second polymeric block that is a polymerized product of a monomer composition 1B containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the composition of the second polymeric block P 2 is different than the composition of the first polymeric block P 1 .
- the composition of the third block is usually selected to be different than the second polymeric block P 2 and can be selected to be the same or different than the composition of the first polymeric block P 1 .
- monomer composition 1A is different than monomer composition 1B and monomer composition 1B is different than monomer composition 1C.
- Monomer composition 1A can be the same or different than monomer composition 1C.
- Each polymeric block can be a homopolymer or a copolymer. If any block is a copolymer, it is typically a random copolymer.
- the photoinitiator of Formula (I) is mixed with a monomer composition 1A (i.e., first monomer composition 1A) to form a reaction mixture 1A (i.e., first reaction mixture 1A).
- Exposing reaction mixture 1A to actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- the product of reaction mixture 1A is a polymeric material of Formula (II- 1).
- reaction mixture 1A e.g., a first monomer composition
- photoinitiator of Formula (I) e.g., a photoinitiator of Formula (I)
- reaction mixture 1A can be neat (i.e., no solvent is present) or can be mixed with a solvent that dissolves both the monomer composition 1A and the photoinitiator of Formula (I).
- the solvent can be added, for example, to lower the viscosity of the first reaction mixture. Any solvent that is added is usually selected so that the growing polymeric material is also soluble.
- the percent solids in reaction mixture 1A is at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, or at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent, up to 80 weight percent, or up to 60 weight percent.
- the amount of solvent added is often selected based on the desired viscosity, particularly the viscosity of the final polymerized material. The desired viscosity is usually sufficiently low so that the final polymeric material can be readily removed from the reactor and/or applied to a substrate.
- the solvent is often an ester (e.g., ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, and ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate), an ether (e.g., dimethyl ether, diethyl ether, ethyl propyl ether, dipropyl ether, methyl t-butyl ether, di-t-butyl ether, dimethoxy ethane, 2-methoxyethanol, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, dioxane, and tetrahydrofuran), acetonitrile, methylene chloride, an aromatic hydrocarbon (e.g., benzene, xylene, and toluene), or a ketone (e.g., acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclopentanone, and cyclohexanone).
- ester e.g., ethyl acetate
- Polymerization of the monomer composition 1A can start at room temperature (e.g., about 20°C to 25°C) but can also start, if desired at higher or lower temperatures.
- Reaction mixture 1A is exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) to activate the photoinitiator of Formula (I) and commence controlled radical polymerization of monomer composition 1A.
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- the resulting polymeric block P 1 can be a homopolymer or a random copolymer.
- reaction mixture 1A Unless the polymeric material will be crosslinked with a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, polymerization of reaction mixture 1A is usually allowed to proceed until greater than 80 weight percent, greater than 85 weight percent, greater than 90 weight percent, greater than 95 weight percent, greater than 98 weight percent, greater than 99 weight percent, or 100 weight percent of the monomers in the monomer composition 1A have undergone controlled radical polymerization. Alternatively, unreacted monomers can be removed from the polymerized material. One of skill in the art is familiar with methods of separating the polymeric material from residual monomers.
- polymerization of reaction mixture 1A can be allowed to proceed to any desired extent until at least 5 weight percent of the monomer composition 1A has undergone controlled radical polymerization.
- the polymerization reaction can proceed until at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent, up to 99 weight percent, up to 98 weight percent, up to 95 weight percent, up to 90 weight percent, up to 85 weight percent, up to 80 weight percent or more, up to 70 weight percent, up to 60 weight percent, or up to 50 weight percent of the monomer composition 1A has undergone controlled radical polymerization.
- the resulting polymeric material can be combined with a second monomer composition containing a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups to form a crosslinkable composition.
- the photoinitiators of Formula (I) are very efficient. During the early stages of polymerization quite a few polymeric chains are initiated and the average molecular weight (both number average and weight average molecular weights) of the formed polymeric material is low. As the polymerization reaction progresses, the average molecular weight tends to increase. In contrast, with many other photoinitiators, even those having both a group of formula -S-(CS)-R 1 and a ketone group such as photoinitiators PI-1 to PI-3 in the Example section, during the early stages of polymerization only a few polymeric chains are initiated and the average molecular weight (both number average and weight average molecular weights) of the formed polymeric material is quite high. As the
- Polymeric materials having more than one polymeric block can be formed from the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1).
- a monomer composition 1B can be added to the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1) to form reaction mixture 1B.
- reaction mixture 1B Upon exposure of reaction mixture 1B to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation), photolysis occurs again releasing the radical of formula R 1 -(CS)-S*.
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- Monomer composition 1B can polymerize to form a second polymeric block P 2 attached to a first polymeric block P 1 in the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1).
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- the product of the reaction mixture 1B is the polymeric material of Formula (II -2).
- a polymeric material of Formula (II-2) can be formed from the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1). After 80 weight percent or more (such as at least 90 weight percent, at least 95 weight percent, at least 98 weight percent, at least 99 weight percent, or 100 weight percent) of the monomer composition 1A has undergone controlled radical polymerization, the polymerization reaction is stopped by terminating exposure to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation).
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- a reaction mixture 1B is formed by adding a monomer composition 1B to the reaction product of the reaction mixture 1A.
- the reaction mixture 1B includes a first polymeric material of Formula (II) plus a monomer composition 1B having at least one monomer with a single ethylenically unsaturated group. It is typically not necessary to add further photoinitiator of Formula (I) to reaction mixture 1B.
- reaction mixture 1B is usually selected so that it solubilizes the first polymeric material of Formula (II- 1), the photoinitiator of Formula (I), and monomer composition 1B. That is, reaction mixture 1B is typically a single phase.
- the percent solids in reaction mixture 1B is selected to have percent solids equal to at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, or at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent (i.e., no solvent is added), up to 80 weight percent, or up to 60 weight percent.
- Suitable solvents are the same as those discussed above for the reaction mixture 1 A.
- the amount of solvent added is selected based on the desired viscosity, particularly the viscosity of the final polymerized material.
- the desired viscosity is usually sufficiently low so that the final polymeric material can be readily removed from the reactor and/or applied to a substrate.
- Reaction mixture 1B is exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) to commence controlled radical polymerization of monomer composition 1B.
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- Polymerization of the second monomer composition can occur at room temperature (e.g., about 20°C to 25°C) but can also occur, if desired at higher or lower temperatures.
- reaction mixture 1B Unless the polymeric material will be crosslinked with a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, the polymerization of reaction mixture 1B is usually allowed to proceed until greater than 80 weight percent, greater than 85 weight percent, greater than 90 weight percent, greater than 95 weight percent, greater than 98 weight percent, greater than 99 weight percent, or 100 weight percent of the monomers in the monomer composition 1B have undergone controlled radical polymerization. Alternatively, unreacted monomers can be removed from the polymerized material. One of skill in the art is familiar with methods of separating the polymeric material from residual monomers.
- polymerization of reaction mixture 1B can be allowed to proceed to any desired extent until at least 5 weight percent of the monomer composition 1B has undergone controlled radical polymerization.
- the polymerization reaction can proceed until at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent, up to 99 weight percent, up to 98 weight percent, up to 95 weight percent, up to 90 weight percent, up to 85 weight percent, up to 80 weight percent or more, up to 70 weight percent, up to 60 weight percent, or up to 50 weight percent of the monomer composition 1B has undergone controlled radical polymerization.
- the resulting polymeric material can be combined with a second monomer composition containing a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups to form the crosslinkable composition.
- the composition of polymeric block P 2 is typically different than the composition of polymeric block P 1 .
- the polymeric blocks P 1 and P 2 have different glass transition temperatures as measured by Differential Scanning Calorimetry.
- the difference in the glass transition temperature of polymeric blocks P 1 and P 2 is at least 40°C, at least 50°C, at least 60°C, at least 70°C, at least 80°C, at least 90°C, or at least l00°C. It is often preferable, that the polymeric material of Formula (II) is soluble in reaction mixture 1B containing monomer composition 1B used to form the polymeric material of Formula (III).
- the transition between two polymeric blocks can be controlled by the percent conversion of reaction mixture 1A to the first polymeric block. If the percent conversion is relatively low (e.g., less than 90 percent), then the reaction mixture 1B will include a mixture of the monomer composition 1B plus remaining unreacted monomer composition 1 A. That is, some of the monomers from the monomer composition 1A will be in the second polymeric block P 2 . To minimize the presence of monomeric units of monomer composition 1A in the second polymeric block P 2 , the percent conversion of the monomer composition 1A should be maximized. A higher percent conversion must be balanced, however, against a longer reaction time. Alternatively, the transition between two polymeric blocks can be controlled by removal of unreacted monomers from the polymerized material. One of skill in the art is familiar with methods of separating the polymeric material from residual monomers.
- a polymeric material of Formula (II-3) can be formed from the polymeric material of Formula (II-2). After 80 weight percent or more (such as at least 90 weight percent, at least 95 weight percent, at least 98 weight percent, at least 99 weight percent, or 100 weight percent) of the monomer composition 1B used to form the polymer of Formula (II -2) has undergone controlled radical polymerization, the polymerization reaction is stopped by terminating exposure to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation).
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- a reaction mixture 1C is formed by adding a monomer composition 1C to the reaction product of the reaction mixture 1B.
- the reaction mixture 1C includes a second polymeric material of Formula (II-2) plus a monomer composition 1C having at least one monomer with a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- any optional solvent that is included in the reaction mixture 1C is usually selected so that it solubilizes the polymeric material of Formula (II-2), the photoinitiator of Formula (I), and the monomer composition 1C. That is, the reaction mixture 1C is typically a single phase.
- the percent solids in the reaction mixture 1C is selected to have percent solids equal to at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, or at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent (i.e., no solvent is added), up to 80 weight percent, or up to 60 weight percent.
- Suitable solvents are the same as those discussed above for the reaction mixture 1 A.
- the amount of solvent added is selected based on the desired viscosity, particularly the viscosity of the final polymerized material.
- the desired viscosity is usually sufficiently low so that the final polymeric material can be readily removed from the reactor and/or applied to a substrate.
- the reaction mixture 1C is exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) to commence controlled radical polymerization of the monomer composition 1C.
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- the resulting P 3 block or blocks can be a homopolymer or a random copolymer.
- Polymerization of the monomer composition 1C can occur at room temperature (e.g., about 20°C to 25°C) but can also occur, if desired at higher or lower temperatures.
- polymerization the polymerization of reaction mixture 1C is usually allowed to proceed until greater than 80 weight percent, greater than 85 weight percent, greater than 90 weight percent, greater than 95 weight percent, greater than 98 weight percent, greater than 99 weight percent, or 100 weight percent of the monomers in the monomer composition 1C have undergone controlled radical polymerization.
- unreacted monomers can be removed from the polymerized material.
- One of skill in the art is familiar with methods of separating the polymeric material from residual monomers.
- polymerization of reaction mixture 1C can be allowed to proceed to any desired extent until at least 5 weight percent of the monomer composition 1C has undergone controlled radical polymerization.
- the polymerization reaction can proceed until at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent, up to 99 weight percent, up to 98 weight percent, up to 95 weight percent, up to 90 weight percent, up to 85 weight percent, up to 80 weight percent or more, up to 70 weight percent, up to 60 weight percent, or up to 50 weight percent of the monomer composition 1C has undergone controlled radical polymerization.
- the resulting polymeric material can be combined with a second monomer composition containing a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups to form the crosslinkable composition.
- the composition of polymeric block P 3 is typically different than the composition of polymeric block P 2
- the composition of polymeric block P 2 is typically different than the composition of polymeric block P 1
- the composition of polymeric block P 3 can be the same or different than the composition of polymeric block P 1 .
- the polymeric blocks P 3 and P 2 have different glass transition temperatures and the polymeric blocks P 2 and P 1 have different glass transition temperatures as measured by Differential Scanning Calorimetry.
- the difference in the glass transition temperature between the polymeric blocks is at least 40°C, at least 50°C, at least 60°C, at least 70°C, at least 80°C, at least 90°C, or at least l00°C.
- Additional polymeric blocks can be added to the polymeric material of Formula (II-3) to form polymeric materials of Formula (II) where the variable y is greater than 3 and z is in a range of 0 to y.
- Each successive precursor polymeric material is added to another monomer composition to form another reaction mixture.
- the reaction mixture is exposed to actinic radiation such as ultraviolet radiation to form the polymeric material with two additional polymeric blocks as described above.
- Adjacent polymeric blocks typically have different compositions, different glass transition temperatures, and different solubility parameters. Because of these differences, a phase separated morphology may result. This phase separation leads to physical crosslinking within the block copolymer and can, for example, increase the cohesive strength of the polymeric material even in the absence of chemical crosslinks.
- the amount of the photoinitiator of Formula (I) included in the reaction mixture for any block impacts the weight average molecular weight of the resulting polymeric block. That is, the weight average molecular weight can be controlled based on the amount of photoinitiator added to the reaction mixture.
- the amount of photoinitiator is typically in a range of 0.001 to 15 weight percent based on the weight of the monomers in the reaction mixture. For comparable reaction conditions, increasing the amount of photoinitiator tends to decrease the weight average molecular weight (as well as the number average molecular weight).
- the amount of the photoinitiator is typically at least 0.001 weight percent, at least 0.005 weight percent, at least 0.01 weight percent, at least 0.02 weight percent, at least 0.03 weight percent, or at least 0.5 weight percent and can be up to 15 weight percent, up to 12 weight percent, up to 10 weight percent, up to 8 weight percent, up to 6 weight percent, up to 5 weight percent, up to 3 weight percent, up to 2 weight percent, or up to 1 weight percent.
- This amount of photoinitiator often results in the formation of polymeric blocks having a weight average molecular weight in a range of 1,000 to 3,000,000 Daltons or in the range of 1,000 to 1 million Daltons.
- the reaction mixtures used to form the polymeric material of Formula (II) typically do not include a chain transfer agent (such as mercaptans and carbon tetrabromide). Chain transfer agents are not needed to control the molecular weight of the resulting polymeric material. Rather, the molecular weight can be varied and controlled through selection of the desired amount of the photoinitiator of Formula (I) and of the desired reaction temperature.
- a chain transfer agent such as mercaptans and carbon tetrabromide.
- the polymeric material of Formula (II) (e.g., the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1), (II-2), or (II-3)) is combined with a second monomer composition to provide a crosslinkable composition.
- the second monomer composition contains a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups.
- the second monomer composition can also include one or more monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the polymeric material can have any desired number of polymeric blocks.
- the polymeric material of Formula (II) that is combined with the second monomer composition in the crosslinkable composition can have any desired extent of polymerization in the outer block (e.g., polymer block P 1 in Formulas (II- 1) and polymer block P 2 in Formulas (II-2).
- the outer blocks are fully polymerized (e.g., the outer blocks are greater than 99 weight percent polymerized based on the weight of monomers used to form the outer block), nearly fully polymerized (e.g., the outer blocks are at least 80 to 99 weight percent polymerized based on the weight of the monomers used to form the outer blocks), or are partially polymerized (e.g., 5 to 80 weight percent polymerized based on the weight of the monomers used to form the outer blocks).
- Polymeric material of Formula (II) with partially polymerized outer blocks are referred to as“syrup polymers”.
- Syrup polymers often includes 5 to 80 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 20 to 95 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group based on a total weight of polymerized (i.e., reacted monomers) and polymerizable material (i.e., unreacted monomers).
- the syrup polymer contains 10 to 80 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 20 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, 10 to 70 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 30 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, 10 to 60 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 40 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, 10 to 50 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 50 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, 10 to 40 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 60 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, 20 to 50 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 50 to 80 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, or 20 to 40 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 60
- the second monomer composition includes a crosslinking monomer plus any unreacted monomers (i.e., monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group) that were present when the polymer of Formula (II) was formed.
- the second monomer composition can further include other monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group that were not present when the polymer of Formula (I) was formed.
- Suitable crosslinking monomers often contain at least two (meth)acryloyl groups, which are often acryloyl groups.
- Exemplary crosslinking monomers with two (meth)acryloyl groups include 1,2- ethanediol diacrylate, 1,3 -propanediol diacrylate, l,4-butanediol diacrylate, l,4-butanediol diacrylate, l,6-hexanediol diacrylate (HDDA), l,9-nonanediol diacrylate, l,l2-dodecanediol diacrylate, butylene glycol diacrylate, bisphenol A diacrylate, diethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, tripropylene glycol diacrylate, polyethylene glycol diacrylate, polypropylene glycol diacrylate, polyethylene/polypropylene copolymer diacryl
- Exemplary crosslinking monomers with three or four (meth)acryloyl groups include, but are not limited to, trimethylolpropane triacrylate (e.g., commercially available under the trade designation TMPTA-N from Surface Specialties, Smyrna, GA and under the trade designation SR-351 from Sartomer, Exton, PA), pentaerythritol triacrylate (e.g., commercially available under the trade designation SR-444 from Sartomer), tris(2-hydroxyethylisocyanurate) triacrylate (commercially available under the trade designation SR-368 from Sartomer), a mixture of pentaerythritol triacrylate and pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (e.g., commercially available from Surface Specialties under the trade designation PETIA with an approximately 1 : 1 ratio of tetraacrylate to triacrylate and under the trade designation PETA-K with an approximately 3 : 1 ratio of tetraacrylate to triacryl
- the crosslinkable composition usually includes 0.01 to 20 weight percent crosslinking monomer based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
- the crosslinkable composition contains at least 0.05 weight percent, at least 0.1 weight percent, at least 0.5 weight percent, or at least 1 weight percent and up to 15 weight percent, up to 10 weight percent, up to 5 weight percent, or up to 1 weight percent crosslinking monomer based on the total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material. Any other monomers included in the crosslinkable composition have a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the overall crosslinkable composition contains 5 to 99.99 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 20 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 0 to 95 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the crosslinkable composition contains 10 to 99.99 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 10 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 0 to 90 weight percent (0 to 89.99 weight percent) monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the crosslinkable composition contains 10 to 80 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 10 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 10 to 90 weight percent monomers (10 to 89.99 weight percent) having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the crosslinkable composition contains 10 to 60 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 10 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 30 to 90 weight percent (30 to 89.99 weight percent) monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the crosslinkable composition contains 10 to 40 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 10 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 50 to 90 weight percent (50 to 89.99 weight percent) monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the amounts are based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material in the crosslinkable composition.
- the crosslinkable composition contains 10 to 40 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 5 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 55 to 90 weight percent (55 to 89.99 weight percent) monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the amounts are based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
- the polymeric material of Formula (II) is selected so that the final crosslinked composition is suitable for use as a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition.
- the polymeric material included in a pressure-sensitive adhesive can have multiple polymeric blocks, the polymeric material often contains a single polymeric block. That is, the variable y in Formula (II) is equal to 1, which is equivalent to the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1).
- the monomers selected to form the polymeric material of Formula (II) are those that will result in an elastomeric material.
- the elastomeric material typically has a glass transition temperature (Tg) that is no greater than 20°C, no greater than l0°C, no greater than 0°C, no greater than -l0°C, no greater than -20°C, no greater than -30°C, no greater than -40°C, or no greater than -50°C.
- Tg glass transition temperature
- the glass transition temperature can be measured using techniques such as
- the glass transition temperature can be estimated using the Fox equation. Lists of glass transition temperatures for homopolymers are available from multiple monomer suppliers such as from BASF Corporation
- the monomeric composition 1A which is herein also referred to as the first monomer composition, often contains at least one low Tg monomer.
- low Tg monomer refers to a monomer having a Tg no greater than 20°C when homopolymerized (i.e., a homopolymer formed from the low Tg monomer has a Tg no greater than 20°C).
- Suitable low Tg monomers are often selected from an alkyl (meth)acrylates, heteroalkyl (meth)acrylates, aryl substituted alkyl acrylate, and aryloxy substituted alkyl acrylates.
- Example low Tg alkyl (meth)acrylate monomers often are non-tertiary alkyl acrylates but can be an alkyl methacrylates having a linear alkyl group with at least 4 carbon atoms.
- alkyl (meth)acrylates include, but are not limited to, n-butyl acrylate, n-butyl methacrylate, isobutyl acrylate, sec-butyl acrylate, n-pentyl acrylate, 2-methylbutyl acrylate, n-hexyl acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, 4-methyl-2 -pentyl acrylate, 2-methylhexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, n-octyl acrylate, 2- octyl acrylate, isooctyl acrylate, isononyl acrylate, isoamyl acrylate, n-decyl acryl
- Example low Tg heteroalkyl (meth)acrylate monomers often have a heteroalkyl group at least 3 carbon atoms, at least 4 carbon atoms, or at least 6 carbon atoms and can have up to 30 or more carbon atoms, up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, or up to 10 carbon atoms.
- Specific examples of heteroalkyl (meth)acrylates include, but are not limited to, 2-ethoxyethyl acrylate, 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethyl acrylate, 2-methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, and tetrahydrofurfiiryl (meth)acrylate.
- Exemplary aryl substituted alkyl acrylates or aryloxy substituted alkyl acrylates include, but are not limited to, 2-biphenylhexyl acrylate, benzyl acrylate, 2-phenoxyethyl acrylate, and 2-phenylethyl acrylate.
- Monomer composition 1A (i.e. first monomer composition) used in reaction mixture 1A, which is herein also referred to as the“first reaction mixture”, for forming a polymeric material of Formula (II) often contains at least 40 weight percent of a low Tg monomer based on a total weight of monomers in monomer composition 1A.
- the monomer composition 1A contains at least 45 weight percent, at least 50 weight percent, at least 60 weight percent, at least 65 weight percent, at least 70 weight percent, at least 75 weight percent, or at least 80 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent, up to 99 weight percent, up to 98 weight percent, up to 95 weight percent, up to 90 weight percent, or up to 85 weight percent of the low Tg monomer.
- Some monomer compositions 1A can include an optional polar monomer.
- the polar monomer has an ethylenically unsaturated group plus a polar group such as an acidic group or a salt thereof, a hydroxyl group, a primary amido group, a secondary amido group, a tertiary amido group, or an amino group. Having a polar monomer often facilitates adherence of the pressure-sensitive adhesive to a variety of substrates.
- Exemplary polar monomers with an acidic group include, but are not limited to, those selected from ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acids, ethylenically unsaturated sulfonic acids, ethylenically unsaturated phosphonic acids, and mixtures thereof.
- Such compounds include those selected from acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, fumaric acid, crotonic acid, citraconic acid, maleic acid, oleic acid, b-carboxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-sulfoethyl methacrylate, styrene sulfonic acid, 2- acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, vinyl phosphonic acid, and mixtures thereof. Due to their availability, the acid monomers are often (meth)acrylic acids.
- Exemplary polar monomers with a hydroxyl group include, but are not limited to, hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates (e.g., 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, and 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate), hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylamides (e.g., 2- hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylamide or 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylamide), ethoxylated hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate (e.g., monomers commercially available from Sartomer (Exton, PA, USA) under the trade designation CD570, CD571, and CD572), and aryloxy substituted hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates (e.g., 2- hydroxy-2-phenoxypropyl (meth)acrylate) .
- hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates e.g., 2-hydroxyeth
- Exemplary polar monomers with a primary amido group include (meth)acrylamide.
- Exemplary polar monomers with secondary amido groups include, but are not limited to, N-alkyl (meth)acrylamides such as N-methyl (meth)acrylamide, N-ethyl (meth)acrylamide, N-isopropyl (meth)acrylamide, N-tert- octyl (meth)acrylamide, or N-octyl (meth)acrylamide.
- Exemplary polar monomers with a tertiary amido group include, but are not limited to, N-vinyl caprolactam, N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, (meth)acryloyl morpholine, and N,N-dialkyl (meth)acrylamides such as N,N-dimethyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-diethyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-dipropyl
- Polar monomers with an amino group include various N,N-dialkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylates and N,N-dialkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylamides.
- Examples include, but are not limited to, N,N-dimethyl aminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-dimethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-dimethylaminopropyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-dimethylaminopropyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-diethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-diethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-diethylaminopropyl (meth)acrylate, and N,N- diethy laminopropy 1 (meth)acry lamide .
- the amount of the optional polar monomer is often in a range of 0 to 30 weight percent based on the weight of monomers in monomer composition 1A (i.e., first monomer composition). If present, the amounts of polar monomers in the first monomer composition is often at least 0.1 weight percent, at least 0.5 weight percent, or at least 1 weight percent based on the total weight of monomers in monomer composition 1A. The amount can be up to 30 weight percent, up to 25 weight percent, up to 20 weight percent, up to 15 weight percent, up to 10 weight percent, or up to 5 weight percent.
- the amount is often in a range of 0 to 30 weight percent, in a range of 0 to 20 weight percent, in a range of 0 to 15 weight percent, in a range of 0 to 10 weight percent, in a range of 0 to 5 weight percent, in a range of 0.5 to 15 weight percent, in a range of 1 to 15 weight percent, or in a range of 1 to 10 weight percent based on a total weight of monomers in monomer composition 1 A.
- Monomer composition 1A (i.e., first monomer composition) can optionally include a high Tg monomer.
- the term“high Tg monomer” refers to a monomer that has a Tg greater than 30°C, greater than 40°C, or greater than 50°C when homopolymerized (i.e., a homopolymer formed from the monomer has a Tg greater than 30°C, greater than 40°C, or greater than 50°C).
- Some suitable high T g monomers have a single (meth)acryloyl group such as, for example, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, n-propyl methacrylate, isopropyl methacrylate, n-butyl methacrylate, isobutyl
- the amount of high Tg monomer used to form the polymeric material of Formula (II) can be up to 50 weight percent or even higher provided that the Tg of the polymeric material is no greater than 20°C. In some embodiments, the amount can be up to 40 weight percent, up to 30 weight percent, up to 20 weight percent, up to 15 weight percent, or up to 10 weight percent. The amount can be at least 1 weight percent, at least 2 weight percent, or at least 5 weight percent. For example, the amount can be in a range of 0 to 50 weight percent, 0 to 40 weight percent, 0 to 30 weight percent, 0 to 20 weight percent, 0 to 10 weight percent, 1 to 30 weight percent, 1 to 20 weight percent, or 1 to 10 weight percent. The amount values are based on a total weight of monomers in monomer composition 1A (i.e., first monomer composition).
- monomer composition 1A can optionally include a vinyl monomer (i.e., a monomer with an ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group).
- a vinyl monomer i.e., a monomer with an ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group.
- optional vinyl monomers include, but are not limited to, various vinyl ethers (e.g., vinyl methyl ether), vinyl esters (e.g., vinyl acetate and vinyl propionate), styrene, substituted styrene (e.g., a-methyl styrene), vinyl halide, and mixtures thereof.
- the vinyl monomers having a group characteristic of polar monomers are considered herein to be polar monomers.
- the vinyl monomers often have a high Tg such as the (meth)acryloyl -containing high Tg monomers described above.
- the amount of the optional vinyl monomer lacking a (meth)acryloyl group is often in a range of 0 to 15 weight percent based on the weight of monomers in monomer composition 1A (i.e. the first monomer composition). If present, the amount of vinyl monomers in the first monomer composition is often at least 0.1 weight percent, 0.2 weight percent, 0.5 weight percent, or 1 weight percent based on the total weight of monomers in the first monomer composition. The amount can be up to 15 weight percent, up to 10 weight percent, or up to 5 weight percent.
- the amount is often in a range of 0 to 15 weight percent, in a range of 0.1 to 10 weight percent, in a range of 0.5 to 5 weight percent, or in a range of 1 to 5 weight percent based on a total weight of monomers in the first monomer composition.
- Overall the elastomeric polymeric material of Formula (II-1) can be formed from a first monomer composition that includes up to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomer.
- the first monomer composition contains 100 weight percent low Tg monomer based on the total weight of monomers in the first monomer composition.
- the first monomer composition contains 40 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomer, 0 to 30 weight percent polar monomer, 0 to 50 weight percent high Tg monomer, and 0 to 15 weight percent vinyl monomers not having a (meth)acryloyl group. In still other embodiments, the first monomer composition contains 60 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomer, 0 to 20 weight percent polar monomer, 0 to 40 weight percent high Tg monomer, and 0 to 10 weight percent vinyl monomers not having a (meth)acryloyl group.
- the first monomer composition contains 75 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomer, 0 to 10 weight percent polar monomer, 0 to 25 weight percent high Tg monomer, and 0 to 5 weight percent vinyl monomers not having a (meth)acryloyl group.
- the resulting elastomeric polymeric material of Formula (II- 1) contains up to 100 weight percent or 100 weight percent low Tg monomer units.
- the weight percent value is based on the total weight of monomeric units in the polymeric material.
- the polymeric material contains 40 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomeric units, 0 to 15 weight percent polar monomeric units, 0 to 50 weight percent high Tg monomeric units, and 0 to 15 weight percent vinyl monomeric units.
- the polymer contains 60 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomeric units, 0 to 10 weight percent polar monomeric units, 0 to 40 weight percent high Tg monomeric units, and 0 to 10 weight percent vinyl monomeric units.
- the polymer contains 75 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomeric units, 0 to 10 weight percent polar monomeric units, 0 to 25 weight percent high Tg monomeric units, and 0 to 5 weight percent monomeric units.
- the weight average molecular weight of the elastomeric polymeric material of Formula (II- 1) is often in a range of 10,000 Da to 1,000,000 Da or even higher.
- the weight average molecular weight can be at least 20,000 Da, at least 30,000 Da, at least 40,000 Da, or at least 50,000 and can be up to 1,000,000 Da, up to 900,000 Da, up to 800,000 Da, up to 700,000 Da, or up to 600,000 Da.
- the elastomeric material of Formula (II- 1) can be a fully polymerized polymeric material (e.g., the outer blocks are greater than 99 weight percent polymerized based on the weight of monomers used to form polymer block P 1 ), a nearly fully polymerized (e.g., the outer blocks are at least 80 to 99 weight percent polymerized polymeric material based on the weight of the monomers used to form polymer block P 1 ), or are partially polymerized (e.g., 5 to 80 weight percent polymerized polymeric material based on the weight of the monomers used to form polymer block P 1 ).
- the partially polymerized polymeric materials are syrup polymers.
- the photoinitiators of Formula (I) allow the formation of syrup polymers that include polymeric chains with a narrower distribution of molecular weights compared to conventionally prepared syrup polymers. These conventionally prepared syrup polymers often contain a small number of longer chains resulting in syrups with higher viscosities. That is, the viscosity of the syrup polymer can be more easily controlled and adjusted with polymeric materials formed using the photoinitiators of Formula (I).
- the elastomeric material of Formula (II- 1) is combined with a second monomer composition containing a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups.
- the only monomer in the second monomer composition is the crosslinking monomer.
- the second monomer composition further includes a monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the single ethylenically unsaturated monomer can be a residual monomer remaining in the syrup polymer or can be additional monomers that were not included in the monomer composition used to form the elastomeric material of Formula (II- 1). Examples of additional monomers are any of those described above.
- the crosslinkable composition can optionally further include a photoinitiator.
- the initiator can be a photoinitiator of Formula (I), a photoinitiator not of Formula (I) such as a conventionally used photoinitiator for free radical polymerization reactions, or mixtures thereof.
- Suitable photoinitiator compounds that are not of Formula (I) include, for example, benzoin ethers (e.g., benzoin methyl ether or benzoin isopropyl ether) or substituted benzoin ethers (e.g., anisoin ether).
- Other exemplary photoinitiators are substituted acetophenones such as 2,2-diethoxyacetophenone or 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone (commercially available under the trade designation
- IRGACURE 651 from BASF Corp. (Florham Park, NJ, USA) or under the trade designation ESACURE KB-l from Sartomer (Exton, PA, USA)).
- Still other exemplary photoinitiators are substituted alpha- ketols such as 2-methyl-2-hydroxypropiophenone, aromatic sulfonyl chlorides such as 2- naphthalenesulfonyl chloride, and photoactive oximes such as 1 -phenyl- 1, 2-propanedione-2-(0- ethoxycarbonyl)oxime.
- photoinitiators include, for example, 1 -hydroxy cyclohexyl phenyl ketone (commercially available under the trade designation IRGACURE 184), bis(acyl)phenyl phosphine oxides such as bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)phenyl phosphine oxide (commercially available under the trade designation IRGACURE 819), l-[4-(2-hydroxyethoxy)phenyl]-2 -hydroxy-2 -methyl-l- propane-l-one (commercially available under the trade designation IRGACURE 2959), 2 -benzyl-2 - dimethylamino-l-(4-morpholinophenyl)butanone (commercially available under the trade designation IRGACURE 369), 2 -methyl- l-[4-(methylthio)phenyl]-2-morpholinopropan-l -one (commercially available under the trade designation IRGACURE 907), and 2 -hydroxy-2 -methyl- 1 -phenyl
- the amount of any added photoinitiator is often in a range of 0 to 1 weight percent based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
- the amount can be at least 0.01 weight percent, at least 0.02 weight percent, at least 0.05 weight percent, or at least 0.1 weight percent and can be up to 1 weight percent, up to 0.8 weight percent, up to 0.5 weight percent, or up to 0.3 weight percent.
- An organic solvent can be added, if desired, to control the viscosity of the crosslinkable composition.
- no organic solvent i.e., the curable composition is free of organic solvent
- only a minimum amount of the organic solvent is added.
- the amount of organic solvent can be up to 60 weight percent or even higher based on a total weight of the crosslinkable composition.
- the amount of organic solvent can be up to 50 weight percent, up to 40 weight percent, up to 30 weight percent, up to 20 weight percent, up to 10 weight percent, or up to 5 weight percent. In some
- organic solvent it is desirable to keep the content of organic solvent as low as possible.
- Any organic solvent used in the second reaction mixture is typically removed at the completion of the crosslinking reaction.
- Suitable organic solvents include, but are not limited to, methanol, tetrahydrofuran, ethanol, isopropanol, heptane, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, toluene, xylene, and ethylene glycol alkyl ether. Those solvents can be used alone or as mixtures thereof.
- the crosslinkable composition is often applied as a layer to a substrate and then exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation). Any suitable substrate can be used.
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- Any suitable substrate can be used.
- an article is provided that includes a first substrate and a crosslinkable composition layer positioned adjacent the first substrate. Any of the crosslinkable composition described above can be used in the crosslinkable composition layer.
- the crosslinkable composition layer can be positioned adjacent to the substrate using any suitable process such as, for example, flow coating, dip coating, spray coating, knife coating, die coating, or extrusion. Once positioned adjacent to the substrate, the crosslinkable coating layer is exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) to react the second monomer composition and form the crosslinkable composition.
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- polymeric material of Formula (II) in the crosslinkable composition is particularly advantageous due to its active end groups (terminal groups).
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- Photolysis occurs releasing the radical of formula R 1 -(CS)-S*.
- Monomers in the crosslinkable composition can polymerize to form crosslinked polymeric block attached to each of the outer blocks in the polymeric material of Formula (II).
- the product is a crosslinked polymeric material.
- polymeric materials are formed using conventional methods using that lack active terminal groups (such as R 1 -(CS)-S- groups in the polymeric materials of Formula (II)) are combined with a crosslinking monomer having multiple ethylenically unsaturated groups, a second polymeric material forms that is separate from the original polymeric material.
- the second polymeric material is crosslinked in the presence of the original polymeric material and the result is the formation of a gelled network.
- the original polymeric material is not involved in the crosslinking reaction and usually is not covalently attached to the second polymeric material in the gelled network.
- the polymeric material of Formula (II) has terminal R 1 -(CS)-S- groups.
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- radicals of formula R 1 -(CS)-S* are released and the original polymeric material undergoes chain extension and crosslinking reactions.
- the crosslinkable composition can be exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) having a UVA maximum in a range of 280 to 425 nanometers.
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- UVA maximum in a range of 280 to 425 nanometers.
- Ultraviolet light sources can be of various types. Low light intensity lights such as black lights, generally provide intensities ranging from 0.1 or 0.5 mW/cm 2 (milliWatts per square centimeter) to 10 mW/cm 2 (as measured in accordance with procedures approved by the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology as, for example, with a UVIMAP UM 365 L-S radiometer manufactured by Electronic Instrumentation & Technology, Inc., in Sterling, VA).
- High light intensity sources generally provide intensities greater than 10, 15, or 20 mW/cm 2 ranging up to 450 mW/cm 2 or greater. In some embodiments, high intensity light sources provide intensities up to 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000 mW/cm 2 .
- UV light to polymerize the monomer component(s) can be provided by various light sources such as light emitting diodes (LEDs), black lights, medium pressure mercury lamps, etc. or a combination thereof.
- the monomer component(s) can also be polymerized with higher intensity light sources as available from Fusion UV Systems Inc.
- the UV exposure time for polymerization and curing can vary depending on the intensity of the light source(s) used.
- complete curing with a low intensity light course can be accomplished with an exposure time ranging from about 30 to 300 seconds; whereas complete curing with a high intensity light source can be accomplished with shorter exposure time ranging from about 5 to 20 seconds.
- Partial curing with a high intensity light source can typically be accomplished with exposure times ranging from about 2 seconds to about 5 or 10 seconds.
- lights that emit a narrow spectrum of light in the ultraviolet region of the electromagnetic spectrum.
- These light sources can include LEDs and lasers, can result in the formation of crosslinkable compositions without the need to add conventional photoinitiators prior to the curing process. These light sources can enhance the rate of polymerization while maintaining the reactive nature of the polymeric material.
- conventional photoinitiators may need to be added to the crosslinkable compositions prior to crosslinking.
- the polymeric materials of Formula (I) have dithiocarbamate or dithiocarbonate terminal groups. That is, the terminal group is typically R 1 -(CS)-S-. Further, some of the crosslinked polymeric materials may have these terminal groups If desired, this terminal group can be replaced after the polymeric material has formed using known methods such as those described, for example, in (a) Taton et al., Handbook of RAFT Polymerization. Bamer-Kowollik, ed., Wiley-VCH: Weinheim, 2008, p. 373, (b) Destarac et al., Polym. Prepr. (Am. Chem. Soc., Div. Polym. Chem.), 2008, 49(2), (c) Destarac, Polymer Preprints, 2008, 49(2), page 179, and (d) Tsarevsky et al., in Controlled Radical
- Suitable methods include, for example, converting the dithiocarbamate or
- the polymeric material with the thiol end group can undergo various radical reactions (e.g., radical catalyzed thiol-ene reactions and radical catalyzed thiol-yne reactions), nucleophilic reactions (e.g., thiol-ene Michael addition reactions, thiol-epoxy reactions, thiol-halide reactions, thiol-isocyanate reactions), or sulfur exchange reactions (e.g., thiol-alkanethiosulfonate reactions and thiol-pyridyl disulfide reactions).
- Other example methods include free-radical reductive cleavage of the dithiocarbamate or dithiocarbonate groups, oxidation with peroxide and ozone, and aminolysis using an amine or ammonia.
- Either the polymeric material of Formula (II) or a crosslinkable composition that contains the polymeric material of Formula (II) can be positioned on any suitable substrate to provide an article.
- the substrate can be flexible or inflexible and can be formed from a polymeric material, glass or ceramic material, metal, or combination thereof.
- Some substrates are polymeric films such as those prepared from polyolefins (e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, or copolymers thereof), polyurethanes, polyvinyl acetates, polyvinyl chlorides, polyesters (polyethylene terephthalate or polyethylene naphthalate), polycarbonates, polymethyl(meth)acrylates (PMMA), ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers, and cellulosic materials (e.g., cellulose acetate, cellulose triacetate, and ethyl cellulose).
- polyolefins e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, or copolymers thereof
- polyurethanes e.g., polyvinyl acetates, polyvinyl chlorides, polyesters (polyethylene terephthalate or polyethylene naphthalate), polycarbonates, polymethyl(meth)acrylates (PMMA), ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers, and cell
- substrates are metal foils, nonwoven materials (e.g., paper, cloth, nonwoven scrims), foams (e.g., polyacrylic, polyethylene, polyurethane, neoprene), and the like.
- nonwoven materials e.g., paper, cloth, nonwoven scrims
- foams e.g., polyacrylic, polyethylene, polyurethane, neoprene
- Such treatments include, for example, application of primer layers, surface modification layer (e.g., corona treatment or surface abrasion), or both.
- the substrate is a release liner.
- Release liners typically have low affinity for the polymeric material, crosslinkable composition, and crosslinked composition.
- Exemplary release liners can be prepared from paper (e.g., Kraft paper) or other types of polymeric material.
- Some release liners are coated with an outer layer of a release agent such as a silicone -containing material or a fluorocarbon-containing material.
- the polymeric material or the crosslinkable composition can be positioned next to a substrate using a roll-to-roll process. That is, the substrate can be moved from a first roll to a second roll in a continuous process. As the substrate moves between the first roll and the second roll, it can be coated with the polymeric material or with the crosslinkable composition.
- a substrate can be regarded as being a web and the web is often a polymeric material such as those described above.
- the polymeric web can be unrolled from a first roll, coated with the crosslinkable composition, exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) for crosslinking, and then rolled onto the second roll.
- actinic radiation e.g., ultraviolet radiation
- the polymeric material or the crosslinkable composition coating can have any desired thickness.
- the thickness of the crosslinkable composition coating is typically selected so that it can be effectively crosslinked when exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation).
- the crosslinkable composition coating has a thickness no greater than 20 mils (500 micrometers), no greater than 10 mils (250 micrometers), no greater than 5 mils (125 micrometers), no greater than 4 mils (100 micrometers), no greater than 3 mils (75 micrometers), or no greater than 2 mils (50 micrometers).
- the thickness is often at least 0.5 mils (12.5 micrometers) or at least 1 mil (25 micrometers).
- the thickness of the crosslinkable composition coating can be in the range of 0.5 mils (2.5 micrometers) to 20 mils (500 micrometers), in the range of 0.5 mils (5 micrometers) to 10 mils (250 micrometers), in the range of 0.5 mils (12.5 micrometers) to 5 mils (125 micrometers), in the range of 1 mil (25 micrometers) to 3 mils (75 micrometers), or in the range of 1 mil (25 micrometers) to 2 mils (50 micrometers).
- the crosslinked composition is a pressure-sensitive adhesive.
- articles with a layer of the crosslinked composition have a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and can be used for many applications typical of such articles.
- the substrate adjacent to the pressure-sensitive layer can be selected depending on the specific application.
- the substrate can be a sheeting material and the resulting article can provide decorative graphics or can be a reflective product.
- the substrate can be label stock (the resulting article is a label with an adhesive layer), a tape backing (the resulting article is an adhesive tape), or a foam.
- the substrate can be a release liner and the resulting article can be a transfer tape.
- the transfer tape can be used to transfer the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to another substrate or surface.
- Other substrates and surface include, for example, a panel (e.g., a metal panel such as an automotive panel) or a glass window.
- the adhesive tapes can be single-sided adhesive tapes with the crosslinkable composition attached to a single side of the tape backing or can be double-sided adhesive tape with a pressure -sensitive adhesive layer on both major surfaces of the tape backing. At least one of the two pressure-sensitive adhesive layers is the crosslinkable composition described above. Double sided adhesive tapes are often carried on a release liner.
- tackifiers can be added to the crosslinkable composition used to form pressure- sensitive adhesives compositions.
- Suitable tackifying resins include rosin resins such as rosin acids and their derivatives (e.g., rosin esters); terpene resins such as polyterpenes (e.g., alpha pinene-based resins, beta pinene-based resins, and limonene-based resins) and aromatic-modified polyterpene resins (e.g., phenol modified polyterpene resins); coumarone-indene resins; and petroleum-based hydrocarbon resins such as C5-based hydrocarbon resins, C9-based hydrocarbon resins, C5/C9-based hydrocarbon resins, and dicyclopentadiene-based resins.
- tackifying resins if added, can be hydrogenated to lower their color contribution to the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. Combinations of various tackifiers can be used, if desired.
- Various embodiments are provided that are reaction mixtures, polymeric materials, crosslinkable compositions, crosslinked compositions, articles containing the polymeric materials, articles containing the crosslinkable compositions or the crosslinked compositions, methods of making articles, and photoinitiators are provided.
- Embodiment 1A is a first reaction mixture.
- the first reaction mixture includes a) a photoinitiator of Formula (I)
- group R 1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R 3 )2.
- group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- Embodiment 2A is the first reaction mixture of embodiment 1A, wherein the photoinitiator of Formula (I) is of Formula (I-A).
- group -OR 10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy (i.e., R 10 is an alkyl, aralkyl, or alkenyl).
- Embodiment 3A is the first reaction mixture of embodiment 1A or 2A, wherein the
- photoinitiator of Formula (I) is of Formula (I-C).
- group -OR 10 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy and group R 20 is an alkyl.
- Embodiment 4A is the reaction mixture of embodiment 3A, wherein -OR 10 is an alkoxy.
- Embodiment 5A is the first reaction mixture of embodiment 1A, wherein the photoinitiator of Formula (I) is of Formula (I-B).
- group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- Embodiment 6A is the first reaction mixture of embodiment 5 A, wherein R 3 is an alkyl.
- Embodiment 7A is the first reaction mixture of any one of embodiments 1A to 6A, wherein the monomer composition 1A comprises 50 to 100 weight percent of a first monomer with a single
- (meth)acryloyl group and 0 to 50 weight percent of a second monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group.
- the weight percent is based on the total weight of monomers in the monomer composition 1A.
- Embodiment 8A is the first reaction mixture of embodiment 7A, wherein the monomer composition 1A comprises 80 to 100 weight percent of the first monomer and 0 to 20 weight percent of the second monomer.
- Embodiment 9A is the first reaction mixture of any one of embodiments 1A to 8A, wherein the first reaction mixture is free of a monomer having more than one ethylenically unsaturated groups.
- Embodiment 1B is a second reaction mixture.
- the second reaction mixture includes a) a polymeric material of Formula (II- 1)
- (P)i means that there is one polymeric block and (P)o-i means that there are 0 to 1 polymeric blocks, each polymeric block being a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising a first monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- Group R 1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R 3 )2.
- Group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- Embodiment 2B is the second reaction mixture of embodiment 1B, wherein the monomer composition 1B comprises 50 to 100 weight percent of a first monomer with a single (meth)acryloyl group and 0 to 50 weight percent of a second monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group. The weight percent is based on the total weight of monomers in the monomer composition 1B.
- Embodiment 3B is the second reaction mixture of embodiment 2B, wherein the monomer composition 1B comprises 80 to 100 weight percent of the first monomer and 0 to 20 weight percent of the second monomer.
- Embodiment 4B is the second reaction mixture of any one of embodiments 1B to 3B, wherein the second reaction mixture is free of a monomer having more than one ethylenically unsaturated groups.
- Embodiment 1C is a third reaction mixture.
- the third reaction mixture includes a) a polymeric material of Formula (II-2)
- a monomer composition 1B an outer polymeric block, which is the block closest to the -S- (CS)-Ri group
- (P)2 means that there are 2 polymeric blocks
- (P)o-2 means that there are 0 to 2 polymeric blocks.
- Group R 1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R 3 )2.
- Group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- Embodiment 2C is the third reaction mixture of embodiment 1C, wherein the monomer composition 1C comprises 50 to 100 weight percent of a first monomer with a single (meth)acryloyl group and 0 to 50 weight percent of a second monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group. The weight percent is based on the total weight of monomers in the monomer composition 1C.
- Embodiment 3C is the third reaction mixture of embodiment 2C, wherein the monomer composition 1C comprises 80 to 100 weight percent of the first monomer and 0 to 20 weight percent of the second monomer.
- Embodiment 4C is the third reaction mixture of any one of embodiments 1C to 3C, wherein the third reaction mixture is free of a monomer having more than one ethylenically unsaturated groups.
- Embodiment 1D is a polymeric material of Formula (II).
- group R 1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R 3 )2.
- Group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- Each P is a polymeric block that comprises a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the variables y and z refer to the number of polymeric blocks.
- the variable y is an integer in a range of 1 to 10
- the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to y.
- Embodiment 2D is a polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-A).
- group -OR 10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy (i.e., R 10 is an alkyl, aralkyl, or alkenyl).
- R 10 is an alkyl, aralkyl, or alkenyl.
- Groups R 2 and P as well as the variables y and z are the same as defined in Formula (II).
- Embodiment 3D is the polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-B).
- Embodiment 4D is the polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-C).
- group -OR 10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy (i.e., R 10 is an alkyl, aralkyl, or alkenyl).
- R 20 is an alkyl.
- Groups P as well as the variables y and z are the same as defined in Formula (II-C).
- Embodiment 5D is the polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II- 1).
- (P)i means that there is one polymeric block (the variable y is 1) and (P)o-i means that there are 0 to 1 polymeric blocks (the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to 1), each polymeric block being a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising a first monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- Group R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are the same as defined for Formula (I) and Formula (II).
- Embodiment 6D is the polymeric material of embodiment 5D, wherein z is equal to 1 and the polymeric material is of Formula (II-1A).
- P 1 refers to a first polymeric block.
- Embodiment 7D is the polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-2).
- (P)2 means that there are 2 polymeric blocks (the variable y is 2) and (P)o-2 means that there are 0 to 2 polymeric blocks (the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to 2).
- Each polymeric block being a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising a first monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- Group R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are the same as defined for Formula (I) and Formula (II).
- Embodiment 8D is the polymeric material of embodiment 7D, wherein z is equal to 2 and the polymeric material is of Formula (II-2A).
- P 1 refers to the first polymeric block and P 2 refers to the second polymeric block.
- Embodiment 9D is the polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-3).
- (P)3 means that there are 3 polymeric blocks (the variable y is 3) and (P)o-3 means that there are 0 to 3 polymeric blocks (the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to 3).
- Each polymeric block being a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising a first monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- Group R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are the same as defined for Formula (I) and Formula (II).
- Embodiment 10D is the polymeric material of embodiment 9D, wherein z is equal to 3 and the polymeric material is of Formula (II-3A).
- P 1 refers to the first polymeric block
- P 2 refers to the second polymeric block
- P 3 refers to the third polymeric block.
- Embodiment 1E is a crosslinkable composition is provided that contains a) a polymeric material of Formula (II)
- group R 1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R 3 ) 2 .
- group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- Each P is a polymeric block that comprises a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the variables y and z refer to the number of polymeric blocks.
- the variable y is an integer in a range of 1 to 10
- the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to y.
- Embodiment 2E is the crosslinkable composition of embodiment 1E, wherein the polymeric material is according to any one of embodiment 2D to 6D.
- Embodiment 3E is the crosslinkable composition of embodiment 1E or 2E, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) (such as Formula (II- 1)) is an elastomeric material.
- the polymeric material of Formula (II) such as Formula (II- 1)
- Embodiment 4E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 3E, wherein the second monomer composition further comprises a monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- Embodiment 5E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 4E, wherein the crosslinkable composition comprises 1) 5 to 99.99 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 2) a second monomer composition comprising a) 0.01 to 20 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, and b) 0 to 95 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, wherein each amount is based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
- the crosslinkable composition comprises 1) 5 to 99.99 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 2) a second monomer composition comprising a) 0.01 to 20 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, and b) 0 to 95 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, wherein each amount is based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
- Embodiment 6E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 5E, wherein the crosslinkable composition comprises 1) 10 to 60 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 2) a second monomer composition comprising a) 0.01 to 10 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, and b) 30 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, wherein each amount is based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
- Embodiment 7E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 6E, wherein the crosslinkable composition comprises 1) 10 to 40 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 2) a second monomer composition comprising a) 0.01 to 5 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, and b) 55 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, wherein each amount is based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
- Embodiment 8E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 2E to 7E, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II- 1) and is a reaction product of first monomer composition comprising 40 to 100 weight percent of a low Tg monomeric unit, 0 to 15 weight percent of a polar monomeric unit, 0 to 50 weight percent of a high Tg monomeric unit (i.e., a high Tg
- (meth)acryloyl -containing monomeric unit (meth)acryloyl -containing monomeric unit), and 0 to 15 weight percent vinyl monomeric units based on a total weight of monomeric units.
- Embodiment 9E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 8E, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) has a weight average molecular weight in a range of 10,000 Daltons to 5 million Daltons.
- Embodiment 10E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 9E, wherein the crosslinkable composition further comprises a photoinitiator.
- Embodiment 11E is the crosslinkable composition of embodiment 10E, wherein the photoinitiator is of Formula (I).
- Embodiment 12E is the crosslinkable composition of embodiment 10E, wherein the photoinitiator is not of Formula (I).
- Embodiment 13E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 12E, wherein the crosslinkable composition further comprises a tackifier.
- Embodiment 1F is a crosslinked composition that includes a cured product of a crosslinkable composition.
- the crosslinkable composition is according to embodiment 1E.
- Embodiment 2F is the crosslinked composition of embodiment 1F, wherein the crosslinkable composition is according to any one of embodiments 2E to 13E.
- Embodiment 3F is the crosslinked composition of embodiment 1F or 2F, wherein the crosslinked composition is a pressure-sensitive adhesive.
- Embodiment 1G is an article that includes a first substrate and a crosslinkable composition layer adjacent to the substrate, wherein the crosslinkable composition is of embodiment 1E.
- Embodiment 2G is the article of embodiment 1G, wherein the crosslinkable composition is according to any one of embodiments 2E to 13E.
- Embodiment 1H is an article that includes a first substrate and a crosslinked composition layer adjacent to the substrate, wherein the crosslinked composition layer includes a cured product of a crosslinkable composition of embodiment 1E.
- Embodiment 2H is the article of embodiment 1H, wherein the crosslinkable composition is according to any one of embodiments 2E to 13E.
- Embodiment II is a method of making an article.
- the method includes providing a first substrate and applying a layer of a crosslinkable composition adjacent to the first substrate.
- the crosslinkable composition is of any one of embodiments 1E to 13E.
- the method further includes exposing the layer of crosslinkable composition to actinic radiation to form a layer of crosslinked composition.
- the actinic radiation includes actinic radiation.
- Embodiment 21 is the method of embodiment II, wherein the substrate is in the form of a polymeric web.
- Embodiment 31 is the method of embodiment II or 21, wherein the actinic radiation is from a light emitting diode.
- Embodiment 1J is an article that includes a first substrate and a layer containing the polymeric material of Formula (II) as described in any one of embodiments 1D to 6D.
- Embodiment 1K is a method of making a polymeric material. The method includes providing a photoinitiator of Formula (I).
- group R 1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R 3 )2.
- Group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- the method further includes preparing a first reaction mixture comprising the photoinitiator of Formula (I) and a first monomer composition comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
- the method still further includes forming a first polymeric material of Formula (II- 1) from the first reaction mixture.
- (P)i means that there is one polymeric block and (P)o-i means that there are zero or one polymeric blocks.
- Each polymeric block is a polymerized product of a first monomer composition.
- Embodiment 1L is a compound of Formula (I-B) that can function as a photoinitiator.
- group R 2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo.
- Each R 3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R 3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
- Embodiment 1M is a compound of Formula (I-C) that can function as a photoinitiator.
- group -OR 10 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy and Group R2 U 0 is an alkyl.
- Stainless steel (SS) panels were cleaned by wiping them three times using methyl ethyl ketone and a clean lint-free tissue. The cleaned panels were allowed to dry at room temperature. Tape samples measuring 0.5 inch (1.27 centimeters) wide and 8 inches (20.3 centimeters) long were cut, then centered on the cleaned panels and adhered to one end such that tape overlapped the panel by 25.4 millimeters (1 inch) in the lengthwise direction. The tape sample was then rolled down one time in each direction using a 4.5 pound (about 2 kilograms) rubber roller.
- peel adhesion strength was measured, under the same temperature and relative humidity as used above, at an angle of 180 degrees and a rate of 305 millimeters/minute (12 inches/minute) using a peel adhesion tester (IMASS Slip/Peel Tester, Model SP-2000, available from IMASS Incorporated, Accord, MA).
- IMASS Slip/Peel Tester Model SP-2000, available from IMASS Incorporated, Accord, MA.
- Four samples were evaluated, the results normalized to ounces/inch (oz/in) and the average value calculated. The results were reported in both ounces/inch (oz/in) and Newtons/decimeter (N/dm).
- Stainless steel (SS) panels were cleaned by wiping them three times using methyl ethyl ketone and a clean lint-free tissue. Tape samples measuring 0.5 inch (1.27 centimeters) wide and between 3 and 4 inches (7.6 and 10.2 centimeters) long were cut, then centered on the cleaned panels and adhered to one end such that tape overlapped the panel by 25.4 millimeters (1 inch) in the lengthwise direction. The tape sample was then rolled down one time in each direction using a 4.5 pound (ca. 2 kilograms) rubber roller.
- isopropanol (871.10 grams, 14.49 moles) was bubbled with nitrogen.
- Sodium metal cubes (20.25 grams, 0.88 moles, Sigma-Aldrich Corporation, Milwaukee, WI) were cut into small pieces and added to the flask over 3 hours. The temperature was then increased to 65 ° C. The sodium dissolved with evolution of hydrogen over 3 additional hours resulting in a clear solution.
- the mixture was cooled to 35°C using an ice bath, which resulted in a thick slurry.
- Carbon disulfide (73.80 grams, 0.97 moles) was then added slowly over 30 minutes. After full addition, the mixture was stirred for an additional 30 minutes resulting in a yellow solution.
- Polymers of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA) were prepared using Photoinitiators 1-6 (PI 1-6) using the materials and amounts shown in Table 1 below as follows.
- a solution of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA, available from BASF Corporation, Charlotte, NC), photoinitiator, and ethyl acetate was placed in a 250 milliliter, 2-necked round bottom flask and degassed with a nitrogen stream for 15 minutes.
- the flask was then held under a positive pressure of nitrogen, stirred magnetically, and irradiated with light emitting diodes (LED) using a 365 nanometer LED array (Model LED365-0556 LED Bank, Clearstone Technologies, Incorporated, Hopkins, MN) at a power setting of 15% and a distance of 3 inches from the flask edge.
- the total energy provided after an exposure time of 5 minutes was 1850 milliJoules/square centimeters at the surface of the solution.
- Samples were removed at intervals throughout the polymerization and molecular weights were determined by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). Monomer conversion (mole%) was determined by proton NMR analysis in deuterated chloroform using the following procedure.
- the 2EHA monomer conversion was calculated as the amount of poly(2EHA) (integral of resonance at 3.94 ppm divided by 2) divided by the sum of poly(2EHA) and unreacted monomer 2EHA (integral of resonance at 5.80 ppm), with the resulting value multiplied by 100.
- Copolymers of the 2EHA polymers Comparative Example 2-8 and Example 3-7, prepared as described above, and isobutyl acrylate (IBA) were prepared using the materials and amounts shown in Table 8 below as follows. Isobutyl acrylate (2.50 grams, IBA, Alfa Aesar) and ethyl acetate (2.50 grams) were added to the final poly(2EHA) solution from Comparative Example 2 (C2-8) and Example 3 (3-7), and (5.00 grams of each solution) in vials. The solutions were purged with dry nitrogen for 10 minutes and the vials capped.
- the vials were then rolled and irradiated with light emitting diodes (LED) using a 365 nanometer LED array (Model LED365-0556 LED Bank, Clearstone Technologies, Incorporated) at a power setting of 15% and at a distance of 3 inches from the top of the vials.
- the total energy provided after an exposure time of 1 minute was 793 milli Joules/square centimeters at the top of the vial.
- the mixtures were evaluated for molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
- the total monomer conversion (mole%) was determined from NMR analysis using the following:
- Polymers of butyl acrylate were prepared using Photoinitiators 1 and 5-8 (PI-1 and PI-5 to PI-8) using the materials and amounts shown in Table 9 below as follows.
- a stock solution of butyl acrylate (BA, 20.00 grams, Alfa Aesar) and ethyl acetate (20.00 grams) was prepared.
- the photoinitiator (0.011 grams) and butyl acrylate stock solution (5.00 grams) were mixed in vials. The solutions were purged with dry nitrogen for 1 minute and the vials capped.
- the vials were then rolled and irradiated under a UV lamp (OSRAM SYLVANIA F15T8/BLB Blacklight Blue, peak wavelength of 362 nanometers) placed 13 centimeters above the vials.
- the total energy provided after an exposure time of 30 minutes was 0.04 milli Joules/square centimeters at the top of the vial.
- the mixtures were evaluated for molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). Monomer conversion (mole%) was determined by proton NMR analysis in deuterated chloroform using the following procedure.
- the BA conversion was calculated as the amount of poly(BA) (integral of resonance at 4.03 ppm divided by 2) divided by the sum of poly(BA) and unreacted monomer BA (integral of resonance at 6.40 ppm), with the resulting value multiplied by 100.
- Copolymers of the BA polymers Comparative Example 5 and Examples 5 and 6, prepared as described above, and isobomyl acrylate (IBOA) were prepared using the materials and amounts shown in Table 10 below as follows. To vials were added isobomyl acrylate (2.50 grams, IBOA, Alfa Aesar) and ethyl acetate (2.50 grams) and the final poly(BA) solutions from Comparative Example 5 and Examples 5 and 6. The solutions were purged with dry nitrogen for 1 minute and the vials capped.
- the vials were then rolled and irradiated under a UV lamp (OSRAM SYLVANIA F15T8/BLB Blacklight Blue, peak wavelength of 362 nanometers) placed 13 centimeters above the vials.
- the total energy provided after an exposure time of 30 minutes was 0.04 milli Joules/square centimeters at the top of the vials.
- the mixtures were evaluated for molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
- Monomer conversion (mole%) was determined by proton NMR analysis in deuterated chloroform using the following procedure.
- the BA conversion was calculated as the amount of poly(BA) (integral of resonance at 4.03 ppm divided by 2) divided by the sum of poly(BA) and unreacted monomer BA (integral of resonance at 6.40 ppm), with the resulting value multiplied by 100.
- the IBOA conversion was calculated as the amount of poly(IBOA) (integral of resonance at 4.58 ppm divided by the sum of poly(IBOA) and unreacted monomer IBOA (integral of resonance at 4.71 ppm), with the resulting value multiplied by 100.
- Polymers of butyl acrylate (BA) were prepared using Photoinitiator 5 (PI-5) as follows. A solution was prepared containing 20.0 grams of butyl acrylate (BA) and 0.23 grams of PI-5. Aliquots of approximately 1 gram of this solution were added to individual vials, purged with nitrogen for two minutes, and then sealed. The vials were irradiated with a UV lamp (OSRAM SYLVANIA F15T8/BLB Blacklight Blue, peak wavelength of 362 nanometers) placed 12.7 centimeters above the vials. The total energy provided after an exposure time of 30 minutes was 0.04 milliJoules/square centimeters at the top of the vials.
- PI-5 Photoinitiator 5
- the vials were removed from the light at various time intervals and evaluated for monomer conversion (gravimetrically and by NMR), molecular weights (by GPC and NMR), as well as fraction of free initiator, and fraction of mono-directional polymer chains (by NMR).
- the gravimetric weight percent (wt%) conversion of monomer was determined by recording the weight of the sample, heating the sample at l20°C for two hours, and then measuring the final weight. The wt% conversion was calculated as follows.
- NMR analysis was carried out as follows. Approximately 50-100 milligrams of each polymer sample was dissolved in approximately 1 milliliter of deuterated chloroform and NMR spectra were acquired on a Bruker AVANCE III 500 MHz spectrometer equipped with a broadband cryoprobe.
- Spectra were acquired with a low tip angle (15 ° ) and a relaxation delay of 4 seconds for good quantitation.
- Two-dimensional (2D) NMR experiments (gCOSY, TOCSY, gHSQC, and gHMBC) were acquired to assign the free initiator and different polymer end groups. As the polymerization progressed, two different type of polymeric chains were observed as depicted in the schematic below.
- FIG. 1 shows the aromatic region of the ' H NMR spectrum for 6% conversion (i.e. polymerization) of the monomers.
- the peak assignments were confirmed from a 2D gHMBC experiment.
- the free initiator has a sharp singlet for the methine proton between two sulfiirs at 7.09 ppm.
- the methine sulfur of the phenyl initiator fragment of the mono-directional polymer chain is shifted upfield to 5.46 ppm.
- the gHMBC correlations from this resonance to the phenyl carbonyl at 195 ppm and xanthate thiocarbonyl at 211 ppm confirm the assignment.
- the term“mono-directional” refers to polymeric chains where a single radical group of formula R3-(CS)-S* has been cleaved to initiate polymeric chain growth in a single direction.
- the bi-directional polymer chain has only the phenyl ketone group in the core, which has resonances between 7.85-8.00 ppm that correlate to a novel carbonyl frequency at 202 ppm.
- the term“bi-directional” refers to polymeric chains where two radical groups of formula R3-(CS)-S* (which in this example are both the xanthate groups i s o - C ⁇ H 7 O - ( C S ) - S * ) have been cleaved to initiate polymeric chain growth in two directions and the resulting initiator fragment
- Percent conversion was calculated as the amount of poly(BA) (integral of resonance at 4.03 ppm divided by 2) divided by the sum of poly(BA) and unreacted monomer BA (integral of resonance at 6.40 ppm) multiplied by 100.
- the degree of polymerization (DP) was determined from the moles of polymer repeat unit (integral at 4.03 ppm divided by 2) divided by the moles of polymer chains.
- each polymer chain type was calculated as follows.
- the moles of mono-direction polymer chains were determined from the resolved methine S-CH resonance at 5.46 ppm (divided by 1).
- the proton resonances of the bi-directional aromatic group partially overlap with the phenyl group of the mono- directional chain and free initiator.
- the bi-directional integrals can be determined by subtraction of the relative molar amounts from other resolved resonances of the free initiator and mono- directional chain.
- the total integral between 7.85-8.20 ppm is the two phenyl protons adjacent to the ketone for all phenyl species.
- Adhesive tapes were prepared from compositions containing the materials and amounts shown in Table 13 as follows.
- the compositions were prepared by mixing isooctyl acrylate (IOA, 3M Corporation, St. Paul, MN), acrylic acid (AA, BASF Corporation, Florham Park, NJ), and various photoinitiators (PI) of the invention.
- the mixtures were purged with nitrogen for 5 minutes then exposed to an OSRAM SYFVANIA F40/350BF BFACKFIGHT (peak wavelength of 352 nanometers, 40 Watts) at a distance of 10 centimeters from the lamp with mixing until a polymeric syrup having a Brookfield viscosity of between 100 and 8000 centiPoise was formed.
- the coated compositions were irradiated for five minutes using UVA lamps (OSRAM SYLVANIA F40/350BL BLACKLIGHT, peak wavelength of 352 nanometers, 40 Watts) to provide total UVA energy of 1050 milliJoules/square centimeter.
- UVA lamps OSRAM SYLVANIA F40/350BL BLACKLIGHT, peak wavelength of 352 nanometers, 40 Watts
- the resulting adhesive tapes were evaluated for 180 degree angle peel adhesion strength and shear adhesion strength as described in the test methods.
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
- Polymerisation Methods In General (AREA)
- Polymerization Catalysts (AREA)
- Graft Or Block Polymers (AREA)
- Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
Abstract
Controlled radical initiators, reaction mixtures containing the controlled radical initiators and various ethylenically unsaturated monomers, polymeric materials formed from the reaction mixtures, crosslinkable compositions containing the polymeric materials, crosslinked compositions formed from the crosslinkable compositions, and articles containing the polymeric materials, the crosslinkable compositions, or the crosslinked compositions are provided. The controlled radical initiators are bis-dithiocarbamate or bis-dithiocarbonate compounds having a single carbon between the two dithiocarbamate or dithiocarbonate groups. Also attached to that single carbon is a ketone group.
Description
POLYMERIC MATERIALS FORMED USING INITIATORS WITH TWO
THIOCARBONYLTHIO-CONTAINING GROUPS
Cross Reference to Related Application
This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/607499, filed December 19, 2017, the disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
Technical Field
Controlled radical initiators and polymeric materials formed using controlled radical initiators are provided.
Background
The performance characteristics of polymeric materials are determined not only by their composition but also by their molecular architecture. For copolymers, various properties such as melt viscosity, glass transition temperature, and modulus are often a function of the distribution of the different monomeric units along the polymeric chain. Conventional radical polymerization methods have limited utility in synthesizing polymers with precise architectural and structural characteristics.
Controlled radical polymerization methods have been developed that allow the preparation of polymers with well-defined molecular weight, polydispersity, topology, composition, and
microstructure. These methods are based on the use of special polymerization mediators, which temporarily and reversibly transform propagating radicals into dormant and/or stable species. These reversible transformations are typically either accomplished by reversible deactivation or by reversible chain transfer. Some of the methods that involve controlled radical polymerization through reversible transformations include iniferter methods, nitroxide mediated polymerization (NMP) methods, atom transfer polymerization (ATRP) methods, and reversible addition-fragmentation (RAFT) methods.
The terms“iniferter” and“photoiniferters” refer to molecules that can act as an initiator, chain transfer agent, and terminator. Various iniferters were discussed in Otsu et al., Makromol. Chem., Rapid Commun., 3, 127-132 (1982). The compound p-xylene bis(N,N-diethyldithiocarbamate) (XDC) has been used to form various acrylic-based block copolymers such as those described in European Patent Applications 0286376 A2 (Otsu et al.) and 0349270 A2 (Mahfuza et al.).
Some polymeric materials have been formed by applying a layer of a crosslinkable composition to the surface of a substrate. The crosslinkable composition can contain a pre-polymer plus additional monomers and a crosslinking agent. Crosslinked compositions can be prepared by exposing the crosslinkable composition to actinic radiation such as ultraviolet radiation. Such polymeric materials and processes are described in U.S. Patents 4,181,752 (Martens et al.), 4,330,590 (Vesley), 4,329,384
(Vesley et ah), 4,379,201 (Heilmann et ah), 5,506,279 (Babu et al.), 5,773,836 (Bennett et al.), and 5,773,485 (Bennett et al.).
Summary
Controlled radical initiators, reaction mixtures containing the controlled radical initiators and various ethylenically unsaturated monomers, polymeric materials formed from the reaction mixtures, crosslinkable compositions containing the polymeric materials, crosslinked compositions formed from the crosslinkable compositions, and articles containing the polymeric materials, the crosslinkable compositions, or the crosslinked compositions are provided. The controlled radical initiators are bis- dithiocarbamate or bis-dithiocarbonate compounds having a single carbon between the two
dithiocarbamate or dithiocarbonate groups. Also attached to that single carbon is a ketone group.
In a first aspect, a first reaction mixture is provided. The first reaction mixture includes a) a photoinitiator of Formula (I)
and b) a first monomer composition containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. In Formula (I), group R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2. Group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or a combination thereof. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
In a second aspect, a polymeric material of Formula (II) is provided.
In Formula (II), group R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2. Group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or a combination thereof. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic. Each P is a polymeric block that comprises a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising at least one monomer
having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. The variables y and z refer to the number of polymeric blocks. The variable y is an integer in a range of 1 to 10, and the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to y·
In a third aspect, a crosslinkable composition is provided that contains a) a polymeric material of Formula (II) as described above in the second aspect and b) a second monomer composition comprising a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups.
In a fourth aspect, a crosslinked composition is provided. The crosslinked composition includes a cured product of a crosslinkable composition. The crosslinkable composition is the same as described above in the third aspect.
In a fifth aspect, an article is provided that includes a first substrate and a polymeric material layer positioned adjacent to the first substrate. The polymeric material is of Formula (II) as described above in the second aspect.
In a sixth aspect, an article is provided that includes a first substrate and a crosslinkable composition layer adjacent to the first substrate. The crosslinkable composition layer contains the crosslinkable composition described above in the third aspect.
In a seventh aspect, another article is provided that includes a first substrate and a crosslinked composition layer adjacent to the first substrate. The crosslinked composition layer contains the crosslinked composition described above in the fourth aspect.
In an eighth aspect, a compound is provided. The compound is of Formula (I-B) and can function as a photoinitiator.
(I-B)
In Formula (I-B), group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or combination thereof. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
In a ninth aspect, a compound is provided. The compound is of Formula (I-C) and can function as a photoinitiator.
(I-C)
In Formula (I-C), group -OR10 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy. Group R20 is an alkyl.
Brief Description of Drawing
FIG. 1 shows the aromatic region of the 'H NMR spectrum for Example 11 after 6 percent conversion (i.e., polymerization) of the monomer.
Detailed Description
Controlled radical initiators, reaction mixtures containing the controlled radical initiators and various ethylenically unsaturated monomers, polymeric materials formed from the reaction mixtures, crosslinkable compositions containing the polymeric materials, crosslinked compositions formed from the crosslinkable compositions, and various articles are provided. The controlled radical initiators are bis-dithiocarbamate or bis-dithiocarbonate compounds having a single carbon between the two dithiocarbamate or dithiocarbonate groups. Also attached to that single carbon is a ketone group.
The controlled radical initiator compounds can be referred to as iniferters because they can function as a controlled radical initiator, transfer agent, and terminator. The controlled radical initiators can be referred to as photoinitiators or photoiniferters because the controlled radical polymerization reaction typically is photolytically induced. The resulting polymeric material formed from the controlled radical initiators have terminal dithiocarbamate or dithiocarbonate groups.
The polymeric materials having well controlled architectures can be formed using these photoinitiator compounds. The polymeric materials can be homopolymers, random copolymers, or block copolymers. Crosslinkable compositions can be prepared that contain the polymeric materials and a monomer composition that includes a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups. When the crosslinkable composition is exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet region of the electromagnetic spectrum), the polymeric material undergoes chain extension and crosslinking reactions.
The terms“a”,“an”, and“the” are used interchangeably with“at least one” to mean one or more of the elements being described.
The term“and/or” means either or both. For example,“A and/or B” means only A, only B, or both A and B.
The terms“polymer” and“polymeric material” are used interchangeably and refer to materials formed by reacting one or more monomers. The terms include homopolymers, copolymers, terpolymers, or the like. Likewise, the terms“polymerize” and“polymerizing” refer to the process of making a polymeric material that can be a homopolymer, copolymer, terpolymer, or the like.
The term“alkyl” refers to a monovalent group that is a radical of an alkane. The alkyl group can have 1 to 32 carbon atoms, 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The alkyl can be linear, branched, cyclic, or a combination thereof. A linear alkyl has at least one carbon atoms while a cyclic or branched alkyl has at least 3 carbon atoms. In some embodiments, if there are greater than 12 carbon atoms, the alkyl is branched.
The term“alkoxy” refers to a monovalent group of formula -ORa where Ra is an alkyl as defined above.
The term“alkylene” refers to a divalent group that is a radical of an alkane. The alkylene group can have 1 to 32 carbon atoms, 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The alkylene can be linear, branched, cyclic, or a combination thereof. A linear alkylene has at least one carbon atoms while a cyclic or branched alkylene has at least 3 carbon atoms. In some embodiments, if there are greater than 12 carbon atoms, the alkyl is branched.
The term“aryl” refers to a monovalent group that is a radical of an aromatic carbocyclic compound. The aryl group has at least one aromatic carbocyclic ring and can have 1 to 5 optional rings that are connected to or fused to the aromatic carbocyclic ring. The additional rings can be aromatic, aliphatic, or a combination thereof. The aryl group usually has 5 to 20 carbon atoms or 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
The term“substituted aryl” refers to an aryl group substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or combination thereof. The aryl is the same as defined above. The alkyl and alkoxy groups are the same as defined above and the halo is selected from chloro, bromo, iodo, or fluoro. As used in defining substituted aryl, the term“combination” means that the aryl can be substituted with multiple different types of substituent groups. Alternatively, the term combination means the aryl can be substituted with an alkyl or alkoxy that is further substituted with a halo.
The term“aryloxy” refers to a monovalent group that is of formula -O-Ar where Ar is an aryl group as defined above.
The term“aralkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted with at least one aryl group. That is, the aralkyl group is of formula -Rd-Ar where Rd is an alkylene and Ar is an aryl. The aralkyl group contains 6 to 40 carbon atoms. The aralkyl group often contains an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or 1 to 10 carbon atoms and an aryl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms or 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
The term“aralkyloxy” refers to a monovalent group of formula -0-Rd-Ar where Rd and Ar are defined above for an aralkyl.
The term“alkenyl” refers to a monovalent group that is a radical of an alkene, which is a compound having at least one carbon-carbon double bond. In some embodiments, the alkenyl has a single carbon-carbon double bond. In some more specific embodiments, the alkenyl has a terminal ethylenically unsaturated group. The alkenyl can be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkenyl has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, or 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
The term“alkenyloxy” refers to a monovalent group of formula -ORb where Rb is an alkenyl as defined above.
The term“heteroalkyl” refers to an alkyl group where at least one of the catenated carbon atoms is replaced with oxy, thio, or -NH-.
The term“heterocyclic ring” refers to a ring structure having at least 1 heteroatom selected from oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur, wherein the ring structure is saturated or unsaturated. The heterocyclic ring
typically has 5 to 7 ring atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms. The heterocyclic ring can optionally be fused to one or more additional rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic and that can be saturated or unsaturated. Any of the rings can optionally be substituted with an alkyl group.
The term“ketone group” refers to a group -(CO)-R2 where R2 is an alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl.
The term“(meth)acryloyl” refers to a group of formula CH2=CHRc-(CO)- where Rc is hydrogen or methyl and the group -(CO)- refers to a carbonyl group.
The term“(meth)acrylate” refers to an acrylate, a methacrylate, or both. Likewise, the term “(meth)acrylamide” refers to an acrylamide, a methacrylamide, or both and the term“(meth)acrylic acid” refers to acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, or both.
The terms“in a range of’ or“in the range of’ are used interchangeably to refer to all values within the range plus the endpoints of the range.
Various reaction mixtures and polymeric materials are provided using a photoinitiator of Formula (I).
More particularly, polymeric materials are formed from a reaction mixture that includes both (a) a photoinitiator of Formula (I) and (b) a monomer composition containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. Upon exposure to actinic radiation in the ultraviolet region of the electromagnetic spectrum, a polymerization reaction commences.
In Formula (I), group R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2. Group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or combination thereof. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
In some embodiments of Formulas (I), each R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy. Such photoinitiators are of Formula (I-A) where -OR10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy (i.e., R10 is an alkyl, aralkyl, or alkenyl).
(I-A)
These photoinitiators are bis-dithiocarbonate compounds having a single carbon atom between the two dithiocarbonate groups.
Suitable alkoxy groups for R1 of Formula (I) and for -OR10 of Formula (I -A) typically have at least 1 carbon atom, at least 2 carbon atoms, at least 3 carbon atoms, or at least 4 carbon atoms and can have up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, or up to 10 carbon atoms. Some example alkoxy groups have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, 2 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Suitable aralkyloxy groups for R1 and for -OR10 typically contains an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms and an aryl group having 5 to 12 carbon atoms, 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The aryl group in the aralkyloxy group is often phenyl. Suitable alkenoxy groups for R1 and for -OR10 typically have at least 2 carbon atoms, at least 3 carbon atoms, or at least 4 carbon atoms and can have up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, up to 10 carbon atoms, or up to 6 carbons. Some example alkenoxy groups have 2 to 20 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, 2 to 8 carbon atoms, 2 to 6 carbon atoms, or 2 to 4 carbon atoms. In many embodiments R10 in Formula (I-A) is an alkyl (i.e., group -OR10 is an alkoxy in Formula (I-A) corresponds to group R1 is an alkoxy in Formula (I)).
(I-C)
In Formula (I-C), group -OR10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy (i.e., R10 is an alkyl, aralkyl, or alkenyl). Suitable alkoxy, aralkyloxy, and alkenoxy groups are the same as described above for Formulas (I) and (I-A). Group R20 is an alkyl. Suitable alkyl groups for R20 typically have at least 1 carbon atom, at least 2 carbon atoms, at least 3 carbon atoms, or at least 4 carbon atoms and can have up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, or up to 10 carbon atoms. Some example alkyl groups have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, 2 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms. In many embodiments of Formula (I-C), -OR10 is an alkoxy (i.e., R10 is an alkyl).
In other embodiments of Formulas (I), group R1 is of formula -N(R3)2. Such photoinitiators are of Formula (I-B).
(I-B)
These photoinitiators are bis-dithiocarbamate compounds having a single carbon atom between the two dithiocarbonate groups.
Each R3 in Formula (I) and Formula (I-B) is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having at least one
heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated (e.g., partially or fully unsaturated) and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic. Suitable alkyl groups typically have at least 1 carbon atom, at least 2 carbon atoms, at least 3 carbon atoms, or at least 4 carbon atoms and can have up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, or up to 10 carbon atoms. Some example alkyl groups have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, 2 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms. When the formula -N(R3)2 forms a first heterocyclic ring, the heterocyclic ring typically has a first ring structure with 5 to 7 ring members or 5 to 6 ring members and with 1 to 3 heteroatoms or 1 to 2 heteroatoms in the ring. If there is one heteroatom in the first ring structure, the heteroatom is nitrogen. If there are two or three heteroatoms in the first ring structure, one heteroatom is nitrogen and any additional heteroatom is selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. The first ring optionally can be fused to one or more second ring structures that are heterocyclic or carbocyclic and saturated or unsaturated (e.g., partially or fully unsaturated). If the second ring structure is heterocyclic, it typically has 5 to 7 or 5 to 6 ring members and 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. If the second ring structure is carbocyclic, it is often benzene or a saturated ring having 5 or 6 ring members. In many embodiments, the heterocyclic ring has a single ring structure with 5 or 6 ring members and with either 1 or 2 heteroatoms in the ring. Examples of heterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to, morpholino, thiomorpholino, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, homo-piperidinyl, indolyl, carbazolyl, imidazolyl, and pyrazolyl. In many embodiments of Formula (I-B), R3 is an alkyl.
Group R2 in Formula (I) (including Formulas (I-A) and (I-B)) is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or a combination thereof. When R2 is an alkyl, the alkyl group typically has at least 1 carbon atom, at least 2 carbon atoms, at least 3 carbon atoms, or at least 4 carbon atoms and can have up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, or up to 10 carbon atoms. Some example alkyl groups have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, 2 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms. When R2 is an aryl or a substituted aryl, the aryl often has 5 to 12 carbon atoms, 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The aryl is often phenyl. Alkyl or alkoxy groups that are substituents of the aryl group typically have 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Halo groups that are substituents of the aryl group typically are bromo, chloro, fluoro, or iodo. A combination of the substituents means that the aryl is substituted with two substituents and they are not of the same type. Alternatively, the listed substituents can be combined together into a single substituent. For example, a combined substituent can be a halo substituted alkyl or alkoxy group. When R2 is an aralkyl, the aralkyl group often contains an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms and an aryl group having 5 to 12 carbon atoms, 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The aryl group in the aralkyl group is often phenyl.
The photoinitiator compounds of Formula (I) can be formed by any suitable method. One suitable method is shown in Reaction Scheme A.
Reaction Scheme A
I: R1_M+ + CS2 R1-(CS)-S M+
(1) (¾
(4) (3) (5)
In this reaction scheme, a dihalo ketone compound (compound (4)) is reacted with a compound of formula R1-(CS)-S M+, which is compound (3) as shown in Reaction II. Compound (3) can be formed, for example, by treating a salt of formula (1) with carbon disulfide (Reaction I). Compound (1) is a salt of an alkoxide, aryloxide, or amine where M+ is an alkali metal, a tetralkyl ammonium ion, a trialkyl ammonium ion, or a dialkylammonium ion. Reaction I is often conducted at temperatures between about 0°C and about 80°C in the presence of an organic solvent such as acetone, acetonitrile, or an alcohol. The reaction (Reaction II) of compound (4) with compound (3) is typically conducted at temperatures between about 0°C and about 80°C in the presence of an organic solvent such as acetone, acetonitrile, or an alcohol.
In some examples of Reaction Scheme A, commercially available compounds of formula R2- (CO)-CHCl2 and R2-CO-CHBr2 (compound (4)) include l,l-dichloropropan-2-one, 2,2-dichloro-l- phenyl-ethanone, 2,2-dibromo-l-(4-bromophenyl)ethenone, l,l-dichloro-3,3-dimethyl-2-butanone, and l,l-dichloro-3,3-dimethyl-2-butanone. Examples of compound (3) include, but are not limited to, sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate and various xanthate salts such as potassium ethyl xanthate, sodium ethyl xanthate, potassium isopropyl xanthate, sodium isopropyl xanthate, and potassium amyl xanthate.
The photoinitiator of Formula (I) (including those of Formulas (I-A), (I-B), and (I-C)) is mixed with one or more monomer compositions to form a polymeric materials of Formula (II).
In Formula (II), groups R1 and R2 are the same as defined for the photoinitiator of Formula (I). Each P is a polymeric block that includes a polymerized product of a monomer composition containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, y is an integer equal to at least 1 (e.g., in a range of 1 to 10, in a range of 1 to 5, or in a range of 1 to 3), and z is an integer in a range of 0 to y. In many embodiments z is equal to y. The variable z and y refer to the number of polymeric blocks. That is,
(P)y means that there are y polymeric blocks P and (P)z means that there are z polymeric blocks P. The molecular weight of each polymeric block can be the same or different.
Each polymeric block P in Formula (II) is the polymerized product of a monomer composition containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. Any monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group can be used based on the desired properties of the resulting polymeric material. In some embodiments, all the monomers used to form any polymeric block P have a single (meth)acryloyl group. In other embodiments, all the monomers used to form any polymeric block P have a single ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group. In still other embodiments, all the monomers used to form any polymeric block P have a single ethylenically unsaturated group and some, but not all, of the ethylenically unsaturated groups are (meth)acryloyl groups. Each polymeric block can be a homopolymer or a copolymer. Any monomer can be used alone or in combination with other monomers to form each polymeric block.
Suitable monomers with a single (meth)acryloyl group that can be used to form the polymeric material of Formula (II) include, but are not limited to, alkyl (meth)acrylates, fluorinated alkyl
(meth)acrylates, aryl (meth)acrylates, aralkyl (meth)acrylates, substituted aryl (meth)acrylates, (meth)acrylic acid, (meth)acrylamide, N-alkyl (meth)acrylamides, N,N-dialkyl (meth)acrylamides, N- alkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylates, N,N-dialkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylates, N-alkylaminoalkyl
(meth)acrylamides, N,N-dialkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylamides, hydroxy-substituted alkyl
(meth)acrylates, hydroxy-substituted alkyl (meth)acrylamides, alkoxylated alkyl (meth)acrylates, acid- substituted alkyl (meth)acrylates, acid-substituted alkyl (meth)acrylamides, glycidyl-containing (meth)acrylates, isocyanate-containing (meth)acrylates such as isocyanate-substituted alkyl
(meth)acrylates, aminosulfonyl-containing (meth)acrylates, cationic monomers such as N,N,N- trialkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylates, zwitterionic monomers (e.g., 2-(N-3-sulfopropyl-N,N- dimethylammonium)ethyl (meth)acrylate), and mixtures thereof. A plurality of different monomers having a single (meth)acryloyl group can be included in the monomer composition for any polymeric block.
In other embodiments, the reaction mixture used to form any block P in the polymeric material of Formula (II) includes a monomer composition containing a monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group. Suitable such monomers include, but are not limited to, N-vinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylcaprolactam, vinyl acetate, vinyl methyl ether, vinyl-2 - ethylhexanoate, vinyl neodecanoate, styrene, isoprene, butadiene, vinyl dimethylazlactone (VDM), isopropenyl dimethylazlactone (IDM), and vinyl oxazole, and the like.
In Formula (II), the variables y and z refer to the number of polymeric blocks P. The variable y is an integer equal to at least 1 (e.g., in a range of 1 to 10, in a range of 1 to 5, in a range of 1 to 3, or in a range of 1 to 2) and the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to y. If the variable y is equal to 1, the variable z is equal to 0 or 1. If z is equal to 0, then the resulting polymeric material has a mono- directional polymeric group. That is, there is a polymeric chain only on one side of the divalent group
-CH[(CO)R2]- in Formula (II). If z is equal to 1, then the resulting polymeric material has a bi directional polymeric group. That is, there is a polymeric group on both sides of the divalent group - CH[(CO)R2]- in Formula (II).
In some embodiments, the polymeric material formed in the early stages of polymerization of the monomer composition results in the formation of a polymeric chain growing on one but not on both sides of the divalent group -CH[(CO)R2]- in Formula (II). That is, the reaction product is predominately a polymeric material having y equal to 1 and z equal to 0. As polymerization proceeds, the reaction product includes a mixture of a first polymeric material having y equal to 1 and z equal to 0 (i.e., this first polymeric material can be referred to as a“mono-directional polymeric material”) and a second polymeric material having y equal to 1 and z equal to 1 (i.e., this second polymeric material can be referred to as a“bi-directional polymeric material”). As the extent of polymerization (i.e., conversion of the monomer composition) increases, the percentage of the polymeric material that is bi-directional typically increases. When the conversion is at least 90 percent, the amount of bi-directional polymeric material is often at least 80 weight percent, at least 90 weight percent, or at least 95 weight percent based on the total weight of polymeric material (i.e., the mono-directional plus bi-directional polymeric material).
Some polymeric materials of Formula (II) are formed from the photoinitiators of Formula (I-A) and are of Formula (II-A).
In Formula (II-A), group R10 is the same as defined in Formula (I-A). Groups R2 and P as well as the variables y and z are the same as defined in Formula (II).
Some polymeric materials of Formula (II) are formed from the photoinitiators of Formula (I-C) and are of Formula (II-C).
In Formula (II-C), groups R10, R20, and P as well as the variables y and z are the same as defined in Formulas (I-C) and (II).
Some polymeric materials of Formula (II) are formed from the photoinitiators of Formula (I-B) and are of Formula (II -B).
In Formula (II-B), groups R2, R3, and P as well as the variables y and z are the same as defined in Formulas (I-B) and (II).
While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that polymerization occurs as shown in Reaction Scheme B to form a material where y is equal to 1 and z is equal to either 0 or 1.
Reaction Scheme B
In Reaction Scheme B, the photoinitiator of Formula (I), which is shown as compound (10), undergoes photolysis of one of the C-S bonds when exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) (Reaction III). Two different radicals, the radical (11) and the radical (12), are formed in Reaction III. In Reaction IV, radical (11) reacts with ethylenically unsaturated monomers (compound (13)). The monomers polymerize and radical (14) is formed. The radical (14) can combine with a radical (12) and the polymerization reaction is terminated. The resulting polymeric material of Reaction V is compound (15). Compound (15) corresponds to the polymeric material of Formula (II) where y is equal to 1 and z is equal to zero (i.e., there is polymeric material on only one side of the -CH[(CO)R2]- group; the polymeric material is mono-directional). Compound (15) can undergo photolysis at one of the C-S bonds in the presence of actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation). Photolysis can result in the generation of radical (12) and radical (16) as shown in Reaction VI. In Reaction VII, radical (16) reacts with ethylenically unsaturated monomers (compound 13). The monomers polymerize and radical (17) is formed. The radical (17) can combine with radical (12) and the polymerization reaction is terminated. The resulting polymeric material formed in Reaction VIII is compound (18). Compound (18) corresponds to the polymeric material of Formula (II) where y is equal to 1 and z is equal to 1 (i.e., there is polymeric material on both sides of the -CH[(CO)R2]- group; the polymeric material is bi-directional). While exposure to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) continues, photolysis of compound (18) can occur and additional monomeric units can be added. When exposure to actinic radiation (e.g.,
ultraviolet radiation) is terminated, no further photolysis can occur, and no additional monomeric units can be added.
Additionally, the dithiocarbonate or dithiocarbamate chain end may be directly transferred between polymeric chains in an addition-fragmentation process. In Reaction IX, for example, radical (14) combines with another molecule of compound (15) to generate radical (19). In Reaction X, radical (19) undergoes homolysis of a carbon-sulfur bond to regenerate radical (14) and compound (15). In Reaction (XI), radical (19) undergoes homolysis on the opposite side of the dithiocarbonate or dithiocarbamate group to generate compound (15) and radical (16), a net transfer of the dithiocarbonate or dithiocarbamate group.
In Reaction Scheme B, compound (13) is a monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. If the ethylenically unsaturated group is a (meth)acryloyl group, Rx is hydrogen or methyl and Ry includes a group -(CO)-X-R11. Group X is oxy or -NR12- where R12 is hydrogen or alkyl. Group R11 is the remainder of the (meth)acryloyl-containing monomer. That is, the monomer is of formula H2C=CRX- (CO)-X-Rn. Group Rx is hydrogen or methyl and group R11 is the remainder, for example, of any (meth)acrylate or (meth)acrylamide monomer described herein.
Polymeric materials of Formula (II) with y equal to 1 can be formed by mixing a photoinitiator of Formula (I) with a monomer composition 1A and exposing the resulting reaction mixture 1A to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet light). The actinic radiation exposure causes the photolysis of the photoinitiator and permits controlled radical polymerization of the monomer composition 1A to form a first polymeric block. When exposure to actinic radiation is terminated, the first polymerization reaction ceases. The product of the first polymerization is a polymeric material of Formula (II- 1) where (P)i indicates that there is one polymeric block and (P)o-i indicates that there is zero to one polymeric blocks.
There may be a first polymeric block P1 on only one side of the -CH[(CO)R2]- group as in the polymeric material of Formula (II-1B) (i.e., z in Formula (II) is equal to 0) or on both sides of the -CH[(CO)R2]- group as in the polymeric material of Formula (II-1A) (i.e., z in Formula (II) is equal to 1). The length of the polymeric chains P1 on either side of the -CH[(CO)R2]- group in the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1 A) can be the same or different.
(II- 1B)
In some embodiments, there may be a polymeric block only on one side of the
-CH[(CO)R2]- group. That is, the variable y is equal to 1 and the variable z is equal to 0 as shown in the polymeric material of Formula (II -IB). Thus, the photoinitiator can be mono-directional in terms of polymeric chain formation. This can be particularly the situation during the early stages of conversion. As the polymerization reaction proceeds, polymerization may occur on both sides of the -CH[(CO)R2]- group. That is, the variable y is equal to 1 and the variable z is equal to 1 in the polymeric material of Formula (II) as shown in Formula (II-1A). In such polymeric material, the size (e.g., the number average molecular weight) of the two polymeric blocks will be different.
In other embodiments, the photoinitiator can be bi-directional in terms of polymeric chain formation. That is, there will be a polymeric block on both sides of the -CH[(CO)R2]- group. The variable y is equal to 1 and the variable z is equal to 1 in the polymeric material of Formula (II). Even though there is a polymeric block on either side of the -CH[(CO)R2]- group, the size (e.g., the number average molecular weight) of the two polymeric blocks can be the same or different.
Another monomer composition, referred to as monomer composition 1B, can be added to the product of the reaction mixture 1A (i.e., the polymeric material of Formula (II-1A) and/or Formula (II- 1B)) to form a reaction mixture 1B. Upon exposure of the reaction mixture 1B to actinic radiation, photolysis occurs again releasing the radical of formula R1-(CS)-S*. Monomer composition 1B can polymerize to form a second polymeric block P2 attached to the end of any polymeric block P1 in the polymeric material of Formula (II-1-1) or (II-1-2). When exposure to actinic radiation is terminated, the second polymerization reaction ceases. If there are two polymeric blocks (P1 and P2), the length of the two polymeric chains can be the same or different. The product of the second polymerization is the polymeric material of Formula (II-2). The designation (P)2 indicates that there are two polymeric blocks and the designation (P)o-2 indicates that are 0 to 2 polymeric blocks.
(II-2)
The number of polymeric blocks on each side of the -CH[(CO)R2]- group in Formula (II-2) can be the same or different. That is, although there can be two blocks on one side of this group, there can be 0, 1 or 2 blocks on the other side. Stated differently, in Formula (II), y is 2 and z is 0, 1, or 2. If a polymeric
block is on both sides of the -CH[(CO)R2]- group, the size (e.g., number average molecular weight) of the polymeric blocks can be the same or different.
In many embodiments of Formula (II-2), both z and y are equal to 2 and the polymeric material is of formula (II-2A).
P1 refers to the first polymeric block and P2 refers to the second polymeric block.
This process can be repeated as many times as desired to add additional polymeric blocks. For example, in the polymeric material of Formula (II-3), the designation (P)3 indicates that there are three polymeric blocks (i.e., y is equal to 3 in Formula (II)) and the designation (P)o-3 indicates that there are 0 to 3 polymeric blocks (i.e., z is in a range of 0 to 3 in Formula (II)).
In many embodiments of Formula (III-3), both z and y are equal to 3 and the polymeric material is of formula (II-3A).
P1 refers to the first polymeric block, P2 refers to the second polymeric block, and P3 refers to the third polymeric block.
This ability to control the architecture of the resulting polymeric material is particularly advantageous when block copolymers are prepared. By first polymerizing a monomer composition 1A and then polymerizing a monomer composition 1B that is different than monomer composition 1A, a polymeric material composition that is primarily a diblock copolymer, that is primarily a triblock copolymer, or a mixture thereof can be formed depending on the specific photoinitiator that is selected.
Each polymeric block (e.g., P, P1, P2, or P3) can have any desired molecular weight. The molecular weight of each block can be the same or different than any other polymeric block. In some embodiments, the weight average molecular weight of any polymeric block is at least 1,000 Daltons, at least 2,000 Daltons, at least 5,000 Daltons, at least 10,000 Daltons, at least 20,000 Daltons, at least 50,000 Daltons, or at least 100,000 Daltons. The weight average molecular weight of any polymeric
block can be up to 1 million Daltons or even higher, up to 750,000 Daltons, up to 500,000 Daltons, up to 200,000 Daltons, or up to 100,000 Daltons. In some embodiments, the polymeric material of Formula (II) has an overall weight average molecular weight in a range of 10,000 Daltons to 5 million Daltons, in a range of 10,000 Daltons to 3 million Daltons, or in a range of 10,000 Daltons to 1 million Daltons.
For polymeric materials having multiple polymeric blocks on at least one side of the
-CH[(CO)R2]- group, different monomer compositions are typically used for each polymeric block. For example, the first polymeric block P1 is a polymerized product of a monomer composition 1A containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. P2 is a second polymeric block that is a polymerized product of a monomer composition 1B containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. The composition of the second polymeric block P2 is different than the composition of the first polymeric block P1. If another polymeric block P3 were added that is a polymerized product of a monomer composition 1C, the composition of the third block is usually selected to be different than the second polymeric block P2 and can be selected to be the same or different than the composition of the first polymeric block P1. Stated differently, monomer composition 1A is different than monomer composition 1B and monomer composition 1B is different than monomer composition 1C. Monomer composition 1A can be the same or different than monomer composition 1C. Each polymeric block can be a homopolymer or a copolymer. If any block is a copolymer, it is typically a random copolymer.
To form a polymeric material of Formula (II) where y is equal to 1 and z is equal to 0 or 1, the photoinitiator of Formula (I) is mixed with a monomer composition 1A (i.e., first monomer composition 1A) to form a reaction mixture 1A (i.e., first reaction mixture 1A). Exposing reaction mixture 1A to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) causes photolysis of the photoinitiator and permits controlled radical polymerization of the monomer composition 1A. When exposure to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) is terminated, the polymerization reaction ceases. The product of reaction mixture 1A is a polymeric material of Formula (II- 1).
More specifically, to prepare a polymeric material of Formula (II- 1), monomer composition 1A (e.g., a first monomer composition) is mixed with a photoinitiator of Formula (I) to form reaction mixture 1A. Reaction mixture 1A can be neat (i.e., no solvent is present) or can be mixed with a solvent that dissolves both the monomer composition 1A and the photoinitiator of Formula (I). The solvent can be added, for example, to lower the viscosity of the first reaction mixture. Any solvent that is added is usually selected so that the growing polymeric material is also soluble. In some embodiments, the percent solids in reaction mixture 1A is at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, or at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent, up to 80 weight percent, or up to 60 weight percent. The amount of solvent added is often selected based on the desired viscosity, particularly the viscosity of the final polymerized material. The desired viscosity is usually sufficiently low so that the final polymeric material can be readily removed from the reactor and/or applied to a substrate.
If a solvent is added, the solvent is often an ester (e.g., ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, and ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate), an ether (e.g., dimethyl ether, diethyl ether, ethyl propyl ether, dipropyl ether, methyl t-butyl ether, di-t-butyl ether, dimethoxy ethane, 2-methoxyethanol, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, dioxane, and tetrahydrofuran), acetonitrile, methylene chloride, an aromatic hydrocarbon (e.g., benzene, xylene, and toluene), or a ketone (e.g., acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclopentanone, and cyclohexanone). Mixtures of solvents can be used. Further, one or more solvents can be combined with water, if miscible. Polymerization of the monomer composition 1A can start at room temperature (e.g., about 20°C to 25°C) but can also start, if desired at higher or lower temperatures.
Reaction mixture 1A is exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) to activate the photoinitiator of Formula (I) and commence controlled radical polymerization of monomer composition 1A. The resulting polymeric block P1 can be a homopolymer or a random copolymer.
Unless the polymeric material will be crosslinked with a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, polymerization of reaction mixture 1A is usually allowed to proceed until greater than 80 weight percent, greater than 85 weight percent, greater than 90 weight percent, greater than 95 weight percent, greater than 98 weight percent, greater than 99 weight percent, or 100 weight percent of the monomers in the monomer composition 1A have undergone controlled radical polymerization. Alternatively, unreacted monomers can be removed from the polymerized material. One of skill in the art is familiar with methods of separating the polymeric material from residual monomers.
Alternatively, if the polymeric material will be crosslinked with a monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, polymerization of reaction mixture 1A can be allowed to proceed to any desired extent until at least 5 weight percent of the monomer composition 1A has undergone controlled radical polymerization. For example, the polymerization reaction can proceed until at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent, up to 99 weight percent, up to 98 weight percent, up to 95 weight percent, up to 90 weight percent, up to 85 weight percent, up to 80 weight percent or more, up to 70 weight percent, up to 60 weight percent, or up to 50 weight percent of the monomer composition 1A has undergone controlled radical polymerization. The resulting polymeric material can be combined with a second monomer composition containing a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups to form a crosslinkable composition.
Advantageously, the photoinitiators of Formula (I) are very efficient. During the early stages of polymerization quite a few polymeric chains are initiated and the average molecular weight (both number average and weight average molecular weights) of the formed polymeric material is low. As the polymerization reaction progresses, the average molecular weight tends to increase. In contrast, with many other photoinitiators, even those having both a group of formula -S-(CS)-R1 and a ketone group such as photoinitiators PI-1 to PI-3 in the Example section, during the early stages of polymerization
only a few polymeric chains are initiated and the average molecular weight (both number average and weight average molecular weights) of the formed polymeric material is quite high. As the
polymerization reaction progresses, the average molecular weight tends to decrease.
Polymeric materials having more than one polymeric block can be formed from the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1). A monomer composition 1B can be added to the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1) to form reaction mixture 1B. Upon exposure of reaction mixture 1B to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation), photolysis occurs again releasing the radical of formula R1-(CS)-S*.
Monomer composition 1B can polymerize to form a second polymeric block P2 attached to a first polymeric block P1 in the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1). When exposure to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) is terminated, the polymerization reaction ceases. The product of the reaction mixture 1B is the polymeric material of Formula (II -2).
More specifically, a polymeric material of Formula (II-2) can be formed from the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1). After 80 weight percent or more (such as at least 90 weight percent, at least 95 weight percent, at least 98 weight percent, at least 99 weight percent, or 100 weight percent) of the monomer composition 1A has undergone controlled radical polymerization, the polymerization reaction is stopped by terminating exposure to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation). A reaction mixture 1B is formed by adding a monomer composition 1B to the reaction product of the reaction mixture 1A. The reaction mixture 1B includes a first polymeric material of Formula (II) plus a monomer composition 1B having at least one monomer with a single ethylenically unsaturated group. It is typically not necessary to add further photoinitiator of Formula (I) to reaction mixture 1B.
Any optional solvent that is included in reaction mixture 1B is usually selected so that it solubilizes the first polymeric material of Formula (II- 1), the photoinitiator of Formula (I), and monomer composition 1B. That is, reaction mixture 1B is typically a single phase. In some embodiments, the percent solids in reaction mixture 1B is selected to have percent solids equal to at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, or at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent (i.e., no solvent is added), up to 80 weight percent, or up to 60 weight percent. Suitable solvents are the same as those discussed above for the reaction mixture 1 A. The amount of solvent added is selected based on the desired viscosity, particularly the viscosity of the final polymerized material.
The desired viscosity is usually sufficiently low so that the final polymeric material can be readily removed from the reactor and/or applied to a substrate.
Reaction mixture 1B is exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) to commence controlled radical polymerization of monomer composition 1B. Polymerization of the second monomer composition can occur at room temperature (e.g., about 20°C to 25°C) but can also occur, if desired at higher or lower temperatures.
Unless the polymeric material will be crosslinked with a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, the polymerization of reaction mixture 1B is usually allowed to proceed until greater than 80 weight percent, greater than 85 weight percent, greater than 90 weight
percent, greater than 95 weight percent, greater than 98 weight percent, greater than 99 weight percent, or 100 weight percent of the monomers in the monomer composition 1B have undergone controlled radical polymerization. Alternatively, unreacted monomers can be removed from the polymerized material. One of skill in the art is familiar with methods of separating the polymeric material from residual monomers.
If the polymeric material will be crosslinked with a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, polymerization of reaction mixture 1B can be allowed to proceed to any desired extent until at least 5 weight percent of the monomer composition 1B has undergone controlled radical polymerization. For example, the polymerization reaction can proceed until at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent, up to 99 weight percent, up to 98 weight percent, up to 95 weight percent, up to 90 weight percent, up to 85 weight percent, up to 80 weight percent or more, up to 70 weight percent, up to 60 weight percent, or up to 50 weight percent of the monomer composition 1B has undergone controlled radical polymerization. The resulting polymeric material can be combined with a second monomer composition containing a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups to form the crosslinkable composition.
The composition of polymeric block P2 is typically different than the composition of polymeric block P1. In some embodiments, the polymeric blocks P1 and P2 have different glass transition temperatures as measured by Differential Scanning Calorimetry. In some embodiments, the difference in the glass transition temperature of polymeric blocks P1 and P2 is at least 40°C, at least 50°C, at least 60°C, at least 70°C, at least 80°C, at least 90°C, or at least l00°C. It is often preferable, that the polymeric material of Formula (II) is soluble in reaction mixture 1B containing monomer composition 1B used to form the polymeric material of Formula (III).
In some embodiments, it is desirable to have sharp transitions between the first polymeric block P1 and the second polymeric blocks P2. The transition between two polymeric blocks can be controlled by the percent conversion of reaction mixture 1A to the first polymeric block. If the percent conversion is relatively low (e.g., less than 90 percent), then the reaction mixture 1B will include a mixture of the monomer composition 1B plus remaining unreacted monomer composition 1 A. That is, some of the monomers from the monomer composition 1A will be in the second polymeric block P2. To minimize the presence of monomeric units of monomer composition 1A in the second polymeric block P2, the percent conversion of the monomer composition 1A should be maximized. A higher percent conversion must be balanced, however, against a longer reaction time. Alternatively, the transition between two polymeric blocks can be controlled by removal of unreacted monomers from the polymerized material. One of skill in the art is familiar with methods of separating the polymeric material from residual monomers.
A polymeric material of Formula (II-3) can be formed from the polymeric material of Formula (II-2). After 80 weight percent or more (such as at least 90 weight percent, at least 95 weight percent, at
least 98 weight percent, at least 99 weight percent, or 100 weight percent) of the monomer composition 1B used to form the polymer of Formula (II -2) has undergone controlled radical polymerization, the polymerization reaction is stopped by terminating exposure to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation). A reaction mixture 1C is formed by adding a monomer composition 1C to the reaction product of the reaction mixture 1B. The reaction mixture 1C includes a second polymeric material of Formula (II-2) plus a monomer composition 1C having at least one monomer with a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
Any optional solvent that is included in the reaction mixture 1C is usually selected so that it solubilizes the polymeric material of Formula (II-2), the photoinitiator of Formula (I), and the monomer composition 1C. That is, the reaction mixture 1C is typically a single phase. In some embodiments, the percent solids in the reaction mixture 1C is selected to have percent solids equal to at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, or at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent (i.e., no solvent is added), up to 80 weight percent, or up to 60 weight percent. Suitable solvents are the same as those discussed above for the reaction mixture 1 A. The amount of solvent added is selected based on the desired viscosity, particularly the viscosity of the final polymerized material.
The desired viscosity is usually sufficiently low so that the final polymeric material can be readily removed from the reactor and/or applied to a substrate.
The reaction mixture 1C is exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) to commence controlled radical polymerization of the monomer composition 1C. The resulting P3 block or blocks can be a homopolymer or a random copolymer. Polymerization of the monomer composition 1C can occur at room temperature (e.g., about 20°C to 25°C) but can also occur, if desired at higher or lower temperatures.
Unless the polymeric material will be crosslinked with a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, polymerization the polymerization of reaction mixture 1C is usually allowed to proceed until greater than 80 weight percent, greater than 85 weight percent, greater than 90 weight percent, greater than 95 weight percent, greater than 98 weight percent, greater than 99 weight percent, or 100 weight percent of the monomers in the monomer composition 1C have undergone controlled radical polymerization. Alternatively, unreacted monomers can be removed from the polymerized material. One of skill in the art is familiar with methods of separating the polymeric material from residual monomers.
If the polymeric material will be crosslinked with a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, polymerization of reaction mixture 1C can be allowed to proceed to any desired extent until at least 5 weight percent of the monomer composition 1C has undergone controlled radical polymerization. For example, the polymerization reaction can proceed until at least 10 weight percent, at least 20 weight percent, at least 30 weight percent, at least 40 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent, up to 99 weight percent, up to 98 weight percent, up to 95 weight percent, up to 90 weight percent, up to 85 weight percent, up to 80 weight percent or more, up to 70 weight percent, up to
60 weight percent, or up to 50 weight percent of the monomer composition 1C has undergone controlled radical polymerization. The resulting polymeric material can be combined with a second monomer composition containing a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups to form the crosslinkable composition.
The composition of polymeric block P3 is typically different than the composition of polymeric block P2, the composition of polymeric block P2 is typically different than the composition of polymeric block P1, and the composition of polymeric block P3 can be the same or different than the composition of polymeric block P1. In some embodiments, the polymeric blocks P3 and P2 have different glass transition temperatures and the polymeric blocks P2 and P1 have different glass transition temperatures as measured by Differential Scanning Calorimetry. In some embodiments, the difference in the glass transition temperature between the polymeric blocks is at least 40°C, at least 50°C, at least 60°C, at least 70°C, at least 80°C, at least 90°C, or at least l00°C.
Additional polymeric blocks can be added to the polymeric material of Formula (II-3) to form polymeric materials of Formula (II) where the variable y is greater than 3 and z is in a range of 0 to y. Each successive precursor polymeric material is added to another monomer composition to form another reaction mixture. The reaction mixture is exposed to actinic radiation such as ultraviolet radiation to form the polymeric material with two additional polymeric blocks as described above.
Adjacent polymeric blocks typically have different compositions, different glass transition temperatures, and different solubility parameters. Because of these differences, a phase separated morphology may result. This phase separation leads to physical crosslinking within the block copolymer and can, for example, increase the cohesive strength of the polymeric material even in the absence of chemical crosslinks.
The amount of the photoinitiator of Formula (I) included in the reaction mixture for any block impacts the weight average molecular weight of the resulting polymeric block. That is, the weight average molecular weight can be controlled based on the amount of photoinitiator added to the reaction mixture. The amount of photoinitiator is typically in a range of 0.001 to 15 weight percent based on the weight of the monomers in the reaction mixture. For comparable reaction conditions, increasing the amount of photoinitiator tends to decrease the weight average molecular weight (as well as the number average molecular weight). The amount of the photoinitiator is typically at least 0.001 weight percent, at least 0.005 weight percent, at least 0.01 weight percent, at least 0.02 weight percent, at least 0.03 weight percent, or at least 0.5 weight percent and can be up to 15 weight percent, up to 12 weight percent, up to 10 weight percent, up to 8 weight percent, up to 6 weight percent, up to 5 weight percent, up to 3 weight percent, up to 2 weight percent, or up to 1 weight percent. This amount of photoinitiator often results in the formation of polymeric blocks having a weight average molecular weight in a range of 1,000 to 3,000,000 Daltons or in the range of 1,000 to 1 million Daltons.
The reaction mixtures used to form the polymeric material of Formula (II) typically do not include a chain transfer agent (such as mercaptans and carbon tetrabromide). Chain transfer agents are
not needed to control the molecular weight of the resulting polymeric material. Rather, the molecular weight can be varied and controlled through selection of the desired amount of the photoinitiator of Formula (I) and of the desired reaction temperature.
For crosslinking, the polymeric material of Formula (II) (e.g., the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1), (II-2), or (II-3)) is combined with a second monomer composition to provide a crosslinkable composition. The second monomer composition contains a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups. Optionally, the second monomer composition can also include one or more monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. The polymeric material can have any desired number of polymeric blocks.
The polymeric material of Formula (II) that is combined with the second monomer composition in the crosslinkable composition can have any desired extent of polymerization in the outer block (e.g., polymer block P1 in Formulas (II- 1) and polymer block P2 in Formulas (II-2). In some embodiments, the outer blocks are fully polymerized (e.g., the outer blocks are greater than 99 weight percent polymerized based on the weight of monomers used to form the outer block), nearly fully polymerized (e.g., the outer blocks are at least 80 to 99 weight percent polymerized based on the weight of the monomers used to form the outer blocks), or are partially polymerized (e.g., 5 to 80 weight percent polymerized based on the weight of the monomers used to form the outer blocks). Polymeric material of Formula (II) with partially polymerized outer blocks are referred to as“syrup polymers”.
Syrup polymers often includes 5 to 80 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 20 to 95 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group based on a total weight of polymerized (i.e., reacted monomers) and polymerizable material (i.e., unreacted monomers). In some embodiments, the syrup polymer contains 10 to 80 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 20 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, 10 to 70 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 30 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, 10 to 60 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 40 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, 10 to 50 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 50 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, 10 to 40 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 60 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, 20 to 50 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 50 to 80 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, or 20 to 40 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 60 to 80 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. The amounts are based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
If a syrup polymer is used in the crosslinkable composition, the second monomer composition includes a crosslinking monomer plus any unreacted monomers (i.e., monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group) that were present when the polymer of Formula (II) was formed.
Optionally, the second monomer composition can further include other monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group that were not present when the polymer of Formula (I) was formed.
Suitable crosslinking monomers often contain at least two (meth)acryloyl groups, which are often acryloyl groups. Exemplary crosslinking monomers with two (meth)acryloyl groups include 1,2- ethanediol diacrylate, 1,3 -propanediol diacrylate, l,4-butanediol diacrylate, l,4-butanediol diacrylate, l,6-hexanediol diacrylate (HDDA), l,9-nonanediol diacrylate, l,l2-dodecanediol diacrylate, butylene glycol diacrylate, bisphenol A diacrylate, diethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, tripropylene glycol diacrylate, polyethylene glycol diacrylate, polypropylene glycol diacrylate, polyethylene/polypropylene copolymer diacrylate, and neopentylglycol hydroxypivalate diacrylate modified caprolactone. Exemplary crosslinking monomers with three or four (meth)acryloyl groups include, but are not limited to, trimethylolpropane triacrylate (e.g., commercially available under the trade designation TMPTA-N from Surface Specialties, Smyrna, GA and under the trade designation SR-351 from Sartomer, Exton, PA), pentaerythritol triacrylate (e.g., commercially available under the trade designation SR-444 from Sartomer), tris(2-hydroxyethylisocyanurate) triacrylate (commercially available under the trade designation SR-368 from Sartomer), a mixture of pentaerythritol triacrylate and pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (e.g., commercially available from Surface Specialties under the trade designation PETIA with an approximately 1 : 1 ratio of tetraacrylate to triacrylate and under the trade designation PETA-K with an approximately 3 : 1 ratio of tetraacrylate to triacrylate), pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (e.g., commercially available under the trade designation SR- 295 from Sartomer), di-trimethylolpropane tetraacrylate (e.g., commercially available under the trade designation SR-355 from Sartomer), and ethoxylated pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (e.g., commercially available under the trade designation SR-494 from Sartomer). An exemplary crosslinking monomer with five (meth)acryloyl groups includes, but is not limited to, dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate (e.g., commercially available under the trade designation SR-399 from Sartomer).
Regardless of whether the polymeric material of Formula (II) is a syrup polymer, a nearly fully polymerized polymeric material, or a fully polymerized polymeric material, the crosslinkable composition usually includes 0.01 to 20 weight percent crosslinking monomer based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material. In many embodiments, the crosslinkable composition contains at least 0.05 weight percent, at least 0.1 weight percent, at least 0.5 weight percent, or at least 1 weight percent and up to 15 weight percent, up to 10 weight percent, up to 5 weight percent, or up to 1 weight percent crosslinking monomer based on the total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material. Any other monomers included in the crosslinkable composition have a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
Thus, the overall crosslinkable composition contains 5 to 99.99 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 20 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 0 to 95 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. In some embodiments, the crosslinkable composition contains 10 to 99.99 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second
monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 10 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 0 to 90 weight percent (0 to 89.99 weight percent) monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. In other embodiments, the crosslinkable composition contains 10 to 80 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 10 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 10 to 90 weight percent monomers (10 to 89.99 weight percent) having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. In still other embodiments, the crosslinkable composition contains 10 to 60 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 10 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 30 to 90 weight percent (30 to 89.99 weight percent) monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. In yet other embodiments, the crosslinkable composition contains 10 to 40 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 10 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 50 to 90 weight percent (50 to 89.99 weight percent) monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. The amounts are based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material in the crosslinkable composition. In a still further embodiment, the crosslinkable composition contains 10 to 40 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and a second monomer composition containing 1) 0.01 to 5 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups and 2) 55 to 90 weight percent (55 to 89.99 weight percent) monomers having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. The amounts are based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
In some specific embodiments, the polymeric material of Formula (II) is selected so that the final crosslinked composition is suitable for use as a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. Although the polymeric material included in a pressure-sensitive adhesive can have multiple polymeric blocks, the polymeric material often contains a single polymeric block. That is, the variable y in Formula (II) is equal to 1, which is equivalent to the polymeric material of Formula (II- 1).
For use as a pressure-sensitive adhesive, the monomers selected to form the polymeric material of Formula (II) are those that will result in an elastomeric material. The elastomeric material typically has a glass transition temperature (Tg) that is no greater than 20°C, no greater than l0°C, no greater than 0°C, no greater than -l0°C, no greater than -20°C, no greater than -30°C, no greater than -40°C, or no greater than -50°C. The glass transition temperature can be measured using techniques such as
Differential Scanning Calorimetry and Dynamic Mechanical Analysis. Alternatively, the glass transition temperature can be estimated using the Fox equation. Lists of glass transition temperatures for homopolymers are available from multiple monomer suppliers such as from BASF Corporation
(Houston, TX, USA), Polysciences, Inc. (Warrington, PA, USA), and Aldrich (Saint Louis, Missouri, USA) as well as in various publications such as, for example, Mattioni et ah, J. Chem. Inf. Comput. Sci., 2002, 42, 232-240.
To form an elastomeric polymeric material of Formula (II- 1), the monomeric composition 1A, which is herein also referred to as the first monomer composition, often contains at least one low Tg monomer. As used herein, the term“low Tg monomer” refers to a monomer having a Tg no greater than 20°C when homopolymerized (i.e., a homopolymer formed from the low Tg monomer has a Tg no greater than 20°C). Suitable low Tg monomers are often selected from an alkyl (meth)acrylates, heteroalkyl (meth)acrylates, aryl substituted alkyl acrylate, and aryloxy substituted alkyl acrylates.
Example low Tg alkyl (meth)acrylate monomers often are non-tertiary alkyl acrylates but can be an alkyl methacrylates having a linear alkyl group with at least 4 carbon atoms. Specific examples of alkyl (meth)acrylates include, but are not limited to, n-butyl acrylate, n-butyl methacrylate, isobutyl acrylate, sec-butyl acrylate, n-pentyl acrylate, 2-methylbutyl acrylate, n-hexyl acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, 4-methyl-2 -pentyl acrylate, 2-methylhexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, n-octyl acrylate, 2- octyl acrylate, isooctyl acrylate, isononyl acrylate, isoamyl acrylate, n-decyl acrylate, isodecyl acrylate, n-decyl methacrylate, lauryl acrylate, isotridecyl acrylate, n-octadecyl acrylate, isostearyl acrylate, n- dodecyl methacrylate, an isomer of any of these monomers, or mixtures of multiple isomers.
Example low Tg heteroalkyl (meth)acrylate monomers often have a heteroalkyl group at least 3 carbon atoms, at least 4 carbon atoms, or at least 6 carbon atoms and can have up to 30 or more carbon atoms, up to 20 carbon atoms, up to 18 carbon atoms, up to 16 carbon atoms, up to 12 carbon atoms, or up to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples of heteroalkyl (meth)acrylates include, but are not limited to, 2-ethoxyethyl acrylate, 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethyl acrylate, 2-methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, and tetrahydrofurfiiryl (meth)acrylate.
Exemplary aryl substituted alkyl acrylates or aryloxy substituted alkyl acrylates include, but are not limited to, 2-biphenylhexyl acrylate, benzyl acrylate, 2-phenoxyethyl acrylate, and 2-phenylethyl acrylate.
Monomer composition 1A (i.e. first monomer composition) used in reaction mixture 1A, which is herein also referred to as the“first reaction mixture”, for forming a polymeric material of Formula (II) often contains at least 40 weight percent of a low Tg monomer based on a total weight of monomers in monomer composition 1A. In some embodiment, the monomer composition 1A contains at least 45 weight percent, at least 50 weight percent, at least 60 weight percent, at least 65 weight percent, at least 70 weight percent, at least 75 weight percent, or at least 80 weight percent and up to 100 weight percent, up to 99 weight percent, up to 98 weight percent, up to 95 weight percent, up to 90 weight percent, or up to 85 weight percent of the low Tg monomer.
Some monomer compositions 1A can include an optional polar monomer. The polar monomer has an ethylenically unsaturated group plus a polar group such as an acidic group or a salt thereof, a hydroxyl group, a primary amido group, a secondary amido group, a tertiary amido group, or an amino group. Having a polar monomer often facilitates adherence of the pressure-sensitive adhesive to a variety of substrates.
Exemplary polar monomers with an acidic group include, but are not limited to, those selected from ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acids, ethylenically unsaturated sulfonic acids, ethylenically unsaturated phosphonic acids, and mixtures thereof. Examples of such compounds include those selected from acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, fumaric acid, crotonic acid, citraconic acid, maleic acid, oleic acid, b-carboxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-sulfoethyl methacrylate, styrene sulfonic acid, 2- acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, vinyl phosphonic acid, and mixtures thereof. Due to their availability, the acid monomers are often (meth)acrylic acids.
Exemplary polar monomers with a hydroxyl group include, but are not limited to, hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates (e.g., 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, and 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate), hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylamides (e.g., 2- hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylamide or 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylamide), ethoxylated hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate (e.g., monomers commercially available from Sartomer (Exton, PA, USA) under the trade designation CD570, CD571, and CD572), and aryloxy substituted hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates (e.g., 2- hydroxy-2-phenoxypropyl (meth)acrylate) .
Exemplary polar monomers with a primary amido group include (meth)acrylamide. Exemplary polar monomers with secondary amido groups include, but are not limited to, N-alkyl (meth)acrylamides such as N-methyl (meth)acrylamide, N-ethyl (meth)acrylamide, N-isopropyl (meth)acrylamide, N-tert- octyl (meth)acrylamide, or N-octyl (meth)acrylamide.
Exemplary polar monomers with a tertiary amido group include, but are not limited to, N-vinyl caprolactam, N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, (meth)acryloyl morpholine, and N,N-dialkyl (meth)acrylamides such as N,N-dimethyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-diethyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-dipropyl
(meth)acrylamide, and N,N -dibutyl (meth)acrylamide.
Polar monomers with an amino group include various N,N-dialkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylates and N,N-dialkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylamides. Examples include, but are not limited to, N,N-dimethyl aminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-dimethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-dimethylaminopropyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-dimethylaminopropyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-diethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-diethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-diethylaminopropyl (meth)acrylate, and N,N- diethy laminopropy 1 (meth)acry lamide .
The amount of the optional polar monomer is often in a range of 0 to 30 weight percent based on the weight of monomers in monomer composition 1A (i.e., first monomer composition). If present, the amounts of polar monomers in the first monomer composition is often at least 0.1 weight percent, at least 0.5 weight percent, or at least 1 weight percent based on the total weight of monomers in monomer composition 1A. The amount can be up to 30 weight percent, up to 25 weight percent, up to 20 weight percent, up to 15 weight percent, up to 10 weight percent, or up to 5 weight percent. For example, the amount is often in a range of 0 to 30 weight percent, in a range of 0 to 20 weight percent, in a range of 0 to 15 weight percent, in a range of 0 to 10 weight percent, in a range of 0 to 5 weight percent, in a range
of 0.5 to 15 weight percent, in a range of 1 to 15 weight percent, or in a range of 1 to 10 weight percent based on a total weight of monomers in monomer composition 1 A.
Monomer composition 1A (i.e., first monomer composition) can optionally include a high Tg monomer. As used herein, the term“high Tg monomer” refers to a monomer that has a Tg greater than 30°C, greater than 40°C, or greater than 50°C when homopolymerized (i.e., a homopolymer formed from the monomer has a Tg greater than 30°C, greater than 40°C, or greater than 50°C). Some suitable high Tg monomers have a single (meth)acryloyl group such as, for example, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, n-propyl methacrylate, isopropyl methacrylate, n-butyl methacrylate, isobutyl
methacrylate, sec-butyl methacrylate, tert-butyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl methacrylate, isobomyl (meth)acrylate, stearyl (meth)acrylate, phenyl acrylate, benzyl methacrylate, 3,3,5 trimethylcyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, 2-phenoxyethyl methacrylate, N-octyl (meth)acrylamide, and mixtures thereof. While various vinyl monomers that do not have a (meth)acryloyl group also are classified as high Tg monomers, they are listed separately below.
The amount of high Tg monomer used to form the polymeric material of Formula (II) can be up to 50 weight percent or even higher provided that the Tg of the polymeric material is no greater than 20°C. In some embodiments, the amount can be up to 40 weight percent, up to 30 weight percent, up to 20 weight percent, up to 15 weight percent, or up to 10 weight percent. The amount can be at least 1 weight percent, at least 2 weight percent, or at least 5 weight percent. For example, the amount can be in a range of 0 to 50 weight percent, 0 to 40 weight percent, 0 to 30 weight percent, 0 to 20 weight percent, 0 to 10 weight percent, 1 to 30 weight percent, 1 to 20 weight percent, or 1 to 10 weight percent. The amount values are based on a total weight of monomers in monomer composition 1A (i.e., first monomer composition).
Still further, monomer composition 1A (i.e., first monomer composition) can optionally include a vinyl monomer (i.e., a monomer with an ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group). Examples of optional vinyl monomers include, but are not limited to, various vinyl ethers (e.g., vinyl methyl ether), vinyl esters (e.g., vinyl acetate and vinyl propionate), styrene, substituted styrene (e.g., a-methyl styrene), vinyl halide, and mixtures thereof. The vinyl monomers having a group characteristic of polar monomers are considered herein to be polar monomers. The vinyl monomers often have a high Tg such as the (meth)acryloyl -containing high Tg monomers described above.
The amount of the optional vinyl monomer lacking a (meth)acryloyl group is often in a range of 0 to 15 weight percent based on the weight of monomers in monomer composition 1A (i.e. the first monomer composition). If present, the amount of vinyl monomers in the first monomer composition is often at least 0.1 weight percent, 0.2 weight percent, 0.5 weight percent, or 1 weight percent based on the total weight of monomers in the first monomer composition. The amount can be up to 15 weight percent, up to 10 weight percent, or up to 5 weight percent. For example, the amount is often in a range of 0 to 15 weight percent, in a range of 0.1 to 10 weight percent, in a range of 0.5 to 5 weight percent, or in a range of 1 to 5 weight percent based on a total weight of monomers in the first monomer composition.
Overall the elastomeric polymeric material of Formula (II-1) can be formed from a first monomer composition that includes up to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomer. In some embodiments, the first monomer composition contains 100 weight percent low Tg monomer based on the total weight of monomers in the first monomer composition. In other embodiments, the first monomer composition contains 40 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomer, 0 to 30 weight percent polar monomer, 0 to 50 weight percent high Tg monomer, and 0 to 15 weight percent vinyl monomers not having a (meth)acryloyl group. In still other embodiments, the first monomer composition contains 60 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomer, 0 to 20 weight percent polar monomer, 0 to 40 weight percent high Tg monomer, and 0 to 10 weight percent vinyl monomers not having a (meth)acryloyl group. In yet other embodiments, the first monomer composition contains 75 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomer, 0 to 10 weight percent polar monomer, 0 to 25 weight percent high Tg monomer, and 0 to 5 weight percent vinyl monomers not having a (meth)acryloyl group.
The resulting elastomeric polymeric material of Formula (II- 1) contains up to 100 weight percent or 100 weight percent low Tg monomer units. The weight percent value is based on the total weight of monomeric units in the polymeric material. In some embodiments, the polymeric material contains 40 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomeric units, 0 to 15 weight percent polar monomeric units, 0 to 50 weight percent high Tg monomeric units, and 0 to 15 weight percent vinyl monomeric units. In still other embodiments, the polymer contains 60 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomeric units, 0 to 10 weight percent polar monomeric units, 0 to 40 weight percent high Tg monomeric units, and 0 to 10 weight percent vinyl monomeric units. In yet other embodiments, the polymer contains 75 to 100 weight percent of the low Tg monomeric units, 0 to 10 weight percent polar monomeric units, 0 to 25 weight percent high Tg monomeric units, and 0 to 5 weight percent monomeric units.
The weight average molecular weight of the elastomeric polymeric material of Formula (II- 1) is often in a range of 10,000 Da to 1,000,000 Da or even higher. For example, the weight average molecular weight can be at least 20,000 Da, at least 30,000 Da, at least 40,000 Da, or at least 50,000 and can be up to 1,000,000 Da, up to 900,000 Da, up to 800,000 Da, up to 700,000 Da, or up to 600,000 Da.
The elastomeric material of Formula (II- 1) can be a fully polymerized polymeric material (e.g., the outer blocks are greater than 99 weight percent polymerized based on the weight of monomers used to form polymer block P1), a nearly fully polymerized (e.g., the outer blocks are at least 80 to 99 weight percent polymerized polymeric material based on the weight of the monomers used to form polymer block P1), or are partially polymerized (e.g., 5 to 80 weight percent polymerized polymeric material based on the weight of the monomers used to form polymer block P1). The partially polymerized polymeric materials are syrup polymers.
Using a syrup polymer rather than a fully or nearly fully polymerized polymeric material can be advantageous in some embodiments. The photoinitiators of Formula (I) allow the formation of syrup polymers that include polymeric chains with a narrower distribution of molecular weights compared to
conventionally prepared syrup polymers. These conventionally prepared syrup polymers often contain a small number of longer chains resulting in syrups with higher viscosities. That is, the viscosity of the syrup polymer can be more easily controlled and adjusted with polymeric materials formed using the photoinitiators of Formula (I).
The elastomeric material of Formula (II- 1) is combined with a second monomer composition containing a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups. In some embodiments, the only monomer in the second monomer composition is the crosslinking monomer. In other embodiments, the second monomer composition further includes a monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. The single ethylenically unsaturated monomer can be a residual monomer remaining in the syrup polymer or can be additional monomers that were not included in the monomer composition used to form the elastomeric material of Formula (II- 1). Examples of additional monomers are any of those described above.
In addition to the polymeric material of Formula (II) (including elastomeric material of Formula (II- 1)) and the various monomers, the crosslinkable composition can optionally further include a photoinitiator. The initiator can be a photoinitiator of Formula (I), a photoinitiator not of Formula (I) such as a conventionally used photoinitiator for free radical polymerization reactions, or mixtures thereof. Suitable photoinitiator compounds that are not of Formula (I) include, for example, benzoin ethers (e.g., benzoin methyl ether or benzoin isopropyl ether) or substituted benzoin ethers (e.g., anisoin ether). Other exemplary photoinitiators are substituted acetophenones such as 2,2-diethoxyacetophenone or 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone (commercially available under the trade designation
IRGACURE 651 from BASF Corp. (Florham Park, NJ, USA) or under the trade designation ESACURE KB-l from Sartomer (Exton, PA, USA)). Still other exemplary photoinitiators are substituted alpha- ketols such as 2-methyl-2-hydroxypropiophenone, aromatic sulfonyl chlorides such as 2- naphthalenesulfonyl chloride, and photoactive oximes such as 1 -phenyl- 1, 2-propanedione-2-(0- ethoxycarbonyl)oxime. Other suitable photoinitiators include, for example, 1 -hydroxy cyclohexyl phenyl ketone (commercially available under the trade designation IRGACURE 184), bis(acyl)phenyl phosphine oxides such as bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)phenyl phosphine oxide (commercially available under the trade designation IRGACURE 819), l-[4-(2-hydroxyethoxy)phenyl]-2 -hydroxy-2 -methyl-l- propane-l-one (commercially available under the trade designation IRGACURE 2959), 2 -benzyl-2 - dimethylamino-l-(4-morpholinophenyl)butanone (commercially available under the trade designation IRGACURE 369), 2 -methyl- l-[4-(methylthio)phenyl]-2-morpholinopropan-l -one (commercially available under the trade designation IRGACURE 907), and 2 -hydroxy-2 -methyl- 1 -phenyl propan- 1 -one (commercially available under the trade designation DAROCUR 1173 from Ciba Specialty Chemicals Corp. (Tarrytown, NY, USA). In some embodiments, the photoinitiator is a substituted acetophenone or a bis(acyl)phenyl phosphine oxide.
The amount of any added photoinitiator is often in a range of 0 to 1 weight percent based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material. For example, the amount can be at least 0.01
weight percent, at least 0.02 weight percent, at least 0.05 weight percent, or at least 0.1 weight percent and can be up to 1 weight percent, up to 0.8 weight percent, up to 0.5 weight percent, or up to 0.3 weight percent.
An organic solvent can be added, if desired, to control the viscosity of the crosslinkable composition. In many embodiments, no organic solvent (i.e., the curable composition is free of organic solvent) or only a minimum amount of the organic solvent is added. The amount of organic solvent can be up to 60 weight percent or even higher based on a total weight of the crosslinkable composition. The amount of organic solvent can be up to 50 weight percent, up to 40 weight percent, up to 30 weight percent, up to 20 weight percent, up to 10 weight percent, or up to 5 weight percent. In some
embodiments, it is desirable to keep the content of organic solvent as low as possible. Any organic solvent used in the second reaction mixture is typically removed at the completion of the crosslinking reaction. Suitable organic solvents include, but are not limited to, methanol, tetrahydrofuran, ethanol, isopropanol, heptane, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, toluene, xylene, and ethylene glycol alkyl ether. Those solvents can be used alone or as mixtures thereof.
To form a crosslinked composition, the crosslinkable composition is often applied as a layer to a substrate and then exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation). Any suitable substrate can be used. Stated differently, an article is provided that includes a first substrate and a crosslinkable composition layer positioned adjacent the first substrate. Any of the crosslinkable composition described above can be used in the crosslinkable composition layer.
The crosslinkable composition layer can be positioned adjacent to the substrate using any suitable process such as, for example, flow coating, dip coating, spray coating, knife coating, die coating, or extrusion. Once positioned adjacent to the substrate, the crosslinkable coating layer is exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) to react the second monomer composition and form the crosslinkable composition.
The use of polymeric material of Formula (II) in the crosslinkable composition is particularly advantageous due to its active end groups (terminal groups). As with the formation of each block of the polymeric material of Formula (II), upon exposure of the crosslinkable composition to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation), photolysis occurs releasing the radical of formula R1-(CS)-S*. Monomers in the crosslinkable composition can polymerize to form crosslinked polymeric block attached to each of the outer blocks in the polymeric material of Formula (II). The product is a crosslinked polymeric material.
If polymeric materials are formed using conventional methods using that lack active terminal groups (such as R1-(CS)-S- groups in the polymeric materials of Formula (II)) are combined with a crosslinking monomer having multiple ethylenically unsaturated groups, a second polymeric material forms that is separate from the original polymeric material. The second polymeric material is crosslinked in the presence of the original polymeric material and the result is the formation of a gelled network. The
original polymeric material is not involved in the crosslinking reaction and usually is not covalently attached to the second polymeric material in the gelled network.
In contrast, the polymeric material of Formula (II) has terminal R1-(CS)-S- groups. When exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation), radicals of formula R1-(CS)-S* are released and the original polymeric material undergoes chain extension and crosslinking reactions. There is no additional second polymeric material formed that is separate from the original polymeric material. That is, the original polymeric material itself is involved in the crosslinking reaction.
The crosslinkable composition can be exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) having a UVA maximum in a range of 280 to 425 nanometers. Ultraviolet light sources can be of various types. Low light intensity lights such as black lights, generally provide intensities ranging from 0.1 or 0.5 mW/cm2 (milliWatts per square centimeter) to 10 mW/cm2 (as measured in accordance with procedures approved by the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology as, for example, with a UVIMAP UM 365 L-S radiometer manufactured by Electronic Instrumentation & Technology, Inc., in Sterling, VA). High light intensity sources generally provide intensities greater than 10, 15, or 20 mW/cm2 ranging up to 450 mW/cm2 or greater. In some embodiments, high intensity light sources provide intensities up to 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000 mW/cm2. UV light to polymerize the monomer component(s) can be provided by various light sources such as light emitting diodes (LEDs), black lights, medium pressure mercury lamps, etc. or a combination thereof. The monomer component(s) can also be polymerized with higher intensity light sources as available from Fusion UV Systems Inc. The UV exposure time for polymerization and curing can vary depending on the intensity of the light source(s) used. For example, complete curing with a low intensity light course can be accomplished with an exposure time ranging from about 30 to 300 seconds; whereas complete curing with a high intensity light source can be accomplished with shorter exposure time ranging from about 5 to 20 seconds. Partial curing with a high intensity light source can typically be accomplished with exposure times ranging from about 2 seconds to about 5 or 10 seconds.
In some embodiments, it is preferable to use lights that emit a narrow spectrum of light in the ultraviolet region of the electromagnetic spectrum. These light sources, which can include LEDs and lasers, can result in the formation of crosslinkable compositions without the need to add conventional photoinitiators prior to the curing process. These light sources can enhance the rate of polymerization while maintaining the reactive nature of the polymeric material.
In other embodiments, where broader wavelength ultraviolet light sources are used such as black lights, conventional photoinitiators may need to be added to the crosslinkable compositions prior to crosslinking.
The polymeric materials of Formula (I) have dithiocarbamate or dithiocarbonate terminal groups. That is, the terminal group is typically R1-(CS)-S-. Further, some of the crosslinked polymeric materials may have these terminal groups If desired, this terminal group can be replaced after the polymeric material has formed using known methods such as those described, for example, in (a) Taton
et al., Handbook of RAFT Polymerization. Bamer-Kowollik, ed., Wiley-VCH: Weinheim, 2008, p. 373, (b) Destarac et al., Polym. Prepr. (Am. Chem. Soc., Div. Polym. Chem.), 2008, 49(2), (c) Destarac, Polymer Preprints, 2008, 49(2), page 179, and (d) Tsarevsky et al., in Controlled Radical
Polymerization: Mechanisms. ACS Symposium Series, American Chemical Society, Washington, DC, 2015, 211-246. Suitable methods include, for example, converting the dithiocarbamate or
dithiocarbonate functionality into a thiol end group through reaction with nucleophiles. The polymeric material with the thiol end group can undergo various radical reactions (e.g., radical catalyzed thiol-ene reactions and radical catalyzed thiol-yne reactions), nucleophilic reactions (e.g., thiol-ene Michael addition reactions, thiol-epoxy reactions, thiol-halide reactions, thiol-isocyanate reactions), or sulfur exchange reactions (e.g., thiol-alkanethiosulfonate reactions and thiol-pyridyl disulfide reactions). Other example methods include free-radical reductive cleavage of the dithiocarbamate or dithiocarbonate groups, oxidation with peroxide and ozone, and aminolysis using an amine or ammonia.
Either the polymeric material of Formula (II) or a crosslinkable composition that contains the polymeric material of Formula (II) can be positioned on any suitable substrate to provide an article. The substrate can be flexible or inflexible and can be formed from a polymeric material, glass or ceramic material, metal, or combination thereof. Some substrates are polymeric films such as those prepared from polyolefins (e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, or copolymers thereof), polyurethanes, polyvinyl acetates, polyvinyl chlorides, polyesters (polyethylene terephthalate or polyethylene naphthalate), polycarbonates, polymethyl(meth)acrylates (PMMA), ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers, and cellulosic materials (e.g., cellulose acetate, cellulose triacetate, and ethyl cellulose). Other substrates are metal foils, nonwoven materials (e.g., paper, cloth, nonwoven scrims), foams (e.g., polyacrylic, polyethylene, polyurethane, neoprene), and the like. For some substrates, it may be desirable to treat the surface to improve adhesion to the polymeric material and/or to the crosslinkable composition and/or to the crosslinked composition. Such treatments include, for example, application of primer layers, surface modification layer (e.g., corona treatment or surface abrasion), or both.
In some embodiments, the substrate is a release liner. Release liners typically have low affinity for the polymeric material, crosslinkable composition, and crosslinked composition. Exemplary release liners can be prepared from paper (e.g., Kraft paper) or other types of polymeric material. Some release liners are coated with an outer layer of a release agent such as a silicone -containing material or a fluorocarbon-containing material.
The polymeric material or the crosslinkable composition can be positioned next to a substrate using a roll-to-roll process. That is, the substrate can be moved from a first roll to a second roll in a continuous process. As the substrate moves between the first roll and the second roll, it can be coated with the polymeric material or with the crosslinkable composition. Such a substrate can be regarded as being a web and the web is often a polymeric material such as those described above. The polymeric web can be unrolled from a first roll, coated with the crosslinkable composition, exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) for crosslinking, and then rolled onto the second roll.
The polymeric material or the crosslinkable composition coating can have any desired thickness. The thickness of the crosslinkable composition coating is typically selected so that it can be effectively crosslinked when exposed to actinic radiation (e.g., ultraviolet radiation). In many embodiments, the crosslinkable composition coating has a thickness no greater than 20 mils (500 micrometers), no greater than 10 mils (250 micrometers), no greater than 5 mils (125 micrometers), no greater than 4 mils (100 micrometers), no greater than 3 mils (75 micrometers), or no greater than 2 mils (50 micrometers). The thickness is often at least 0.5 mils (12.5 micrometers) or at least 1 mil (25 micrometers). For example, the thickness of the crosslinkable composition coating can be in the range of 0.5 mils (2.5 micrometers) to 20 mils (500 micrometers), in the range of 0.5 mils (5 micrometers) to 10 mils (250 micrometers), in the range of 0.5 mils (12.5 micrometers) to 5 mils (125 micrometers), in the range of 1 mil (25 micrometers) to 3 mils (75 micrometers), or in the range of 1 mil (25 micrometers) to 2 mils (50 micrometers).
In some embodiments, the crosslinked composition is a pressure-sensitive adhesive. Thus, articles with a layer of the crosslinked composition have a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and can be used for many applications typical of such articles. The substrate adjacent to the pressure-sensitive layer can be selected depending on the specific application. For example, the substrate can be a sheeting material and the resulting article can provide decorative graphics or can be a reflective product. In other examples, the substrate can be label stock (the resulting article is a label with an adhesive layer), a tape backing (the resulting article is an adhesive tape), or a foam. In yet other examples, the substrate can be a release liner and the resulting article can be a transfer tape. The transfer tape can be used to transfer the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to another substrate or surface. Other substrates and surface include, for example, a panel (e.g., a metal panel such as an automotive panel) or a glass window.
Some articles are adhesive tapes. The adhesive tapes can be single-sided adhesive tapes with the crosslinkable composition attached to a single side of the tape backing or can be double-sided adhesive tape with a pressure -sensitive adhesive layer on both major surfaces of the tape backing. At least one of the two pressure-sensitive adhesive layers is the crosslinkable composition described above. Double sided adhesive tapes are often carried on a release liner.
If desired, tackifiers can be added to the crosslinkable composition used to form pressure- sensitive adhesives compositions. Suitable tackifying resins include rosin resins such as rosin acids and their derivatives (e.g., rosin esters); terpene resins such as polyterpenes (e.g., alpha pinene-based resins, beta pinene-based resins, and limonene-based resins) and aromatic-modified polyterpene resins (e.g., phenol modified polyterpene resins); coumarone-indene resins; and petroleum-based hydrocarbon resins such as C5-based hydrocarbon resins, C9-based hydrocarbon resins, C5/C9-based hydrocarbon resins, and dicyclopentadiene-based resins. These tackifying resins, if added, can be hydrogenated to lower their color contribution to the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. Combinations of various tackifiers can be used, if desired.
Various embodiments are provided that are reaction mixtures, polymeric materials, crosslinkable compositions, crosslinked compositions, articles containing the polymeric materials, articles containing the crosslinkable compositions or the crosslinked compositions, methods of making articles, and photoinitiators are provided.
Embodiment 1A is a first reaction mixture. The first reaction mixture includes a) a photoinitiator of Formula (I)
and b) a monomer composition 1A containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. In Formula (I), group R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2. Group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
Embodiment 2A is the first reaction mixture of embodiment 1A, wherein the photoinitiator of Formula (I) is of Formula (I-A).
(I-A)
In Formula (I-A), group -OR10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy (i.e., R10 is an alkyl, aralkyl, or alkenyl).
Embodiment 3A is the first reaction mixture of embodiment 1A or 2A, wherein the
(I-C)
In Formula (I-C), group -OR10 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy and group R20 is an alkyl.
Embodiment 4A is the reaction mixture of embodiment 3A, wherein -OR10 is an alkoxy.
Embodiment 5A is the first reaction mixture of embodiment 1A, wherein the photoinitiator of Formula (I) is of Formula (I-B).
(I-B)
In Formula (I-B), group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
Embodiment 6A is the first reaction mixture of embodiment 5 A, wherein R3 is an alkyl.
Embodiment 7A is the first reaction mixture of any one of embodiments 1A to 6A, wherein the monomer composition 1A comprises 50 to 100 weight percent of a first monomer with a single
(meth)acryloyl group and 0 to 50 weight percent of a second monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group. The weight percent is based on the total weight of monomers in the monomer composition 1A.
Embodiment 8A is the first reaction mixture of embodiment 7A, wherein the monomer composition 1A comprises 80 to 100 weight percent of the first monomer and 0 to 20 weight percent of the second monomer.
Embodiment 9A is the first reaction mixture of any one of embodiments 1A to 8A, wherein the first reaction mixture is free of a monomer having more than one ethylenically unsaturated groups.
Embodiment 1B is a second reaction mixture. The second reaction mixture includes a) a polymeric material of Formula (II- 1)
and b) monomer composition 1B comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, wherein the monomer composition 1B is different than a monomer composition 1A used to form a polymeric material of Formula (II- 1). (P)i means that there is one polymeric block and (P)o-i means that there are 0 to 1 polymeric blocks, each polymeric block being a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising a first monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. Group R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2. Group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and
sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
Embodiment 2B is the second reaction mixture of embodiment 1B, wherein the monomer composition 1B comprises 50 to 100 weight percent of a first monomer with a single (meth)acryloyl group and 0 to 50 weight percent of a second monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group. The weight percent is based on the total weight of monomers in the monomer composition 1B.
Embodiment 3B is the second reaction mixture of embodiment 2B, wherein the monomer composition 1B comprises 80 to 100 weight percent of the first monomer and 0 to 20 weight percent of the second monomer.
Embodiment 4B is the second reaction mixture of any one of embodiments 1B to 3B, wherein the second reaction mixture is free of a monomer having more than one ethylenically unsaturated groups.
Embodiment 1C is a third reaction mixture. The third reaction mixture includes a) a polymeric material of Formula (II-2)
(II-2) and b) a monomer composition 1C comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, wherein the monomer composition 1C is different than a monomer composition 1B used to form a second polymeric block (an outer polymeric block, which is the block closest to the -S- (CS)-Ri group) of a polymeric material of Formula (II-2). In Formula (II -2), (P)2 means that there are 2 polymeric blocks and (P)o-2 means that there are 0 to 2 polymeric blocks. Group R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2. Group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
Embodiment 2C is the third reaction mixture of embodiment 1C, wherein the monomer composition 1C comprises 50 to 100 weight percent of a first monomer with a single (meth)acryloyl group and 0 to 50 weight percent of a second monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group that is not a (meth)acryloyl group. The weight percent is based on the total weight of monomers in the monomer composition 1C.
Embodiment 3C is the third reaction mixture of embodiment 2C, wherein the monomer composition 1C comprises 80 to 100 weight percent of the first monomer and 0 to 20 weight percent of the second monomer.
Embodiment 4C is the third reaction mixture of any one of embodiments 1C to 3C, wherein the third reaction mixture is free of a monomer having more than one ethylenically unsaturated groups.
Embodiment 1D is a polymeric material of Formula (II).
In Formula (II), group R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2. Group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic. Each P is a polymeric block that comprises a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. The variables y and z refer to the number of polymeric blocks. The variable y is an integer in a range of 1 to 10, and the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to y.
Embodiment 2D is a polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-A).
In Formula (II-A), group -OR10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy (i.e., R10 is an alkyl, aralkyl, or alkenyl). Groups R2 and P as well as the variables y and z are the same as defined in Formula (II).
Embodiment 3D is the polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-B).
In Formula (II-B), groups R2, R3, and P as well as the variables y and z are the same as defined in Formulas (I-B) and (II).
Embodiment 4D is the polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-C).
In Formula (II-C), group -OR10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy (i.e., R10 is an alkyl, aralkyl, or alkenyl). R20 is an alkyl. Groups P as well as the variables y and z are the same as defined in Formula
(II).
Embodiment 5D is the polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II- 1).
(II-1)
(P)i means that there is one polymeric block (the variable y is 1) and (P)o-i means that there are 0 to 1 polymeric blocks (the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to 1), each polymeric block being a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising a first monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. Group R1, R2, and R3 are the same as defined for Formula (I) and Formula (II).
Embodiment 6D is the polymeric material of embodiment 5D, wherein z is equal to 1 and the polymeric material is of Formula (II-1A).
(II- 1 A)
P1 refers to a first polymeric block.
Embodiment 7D is the polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-2).
(P-2)
In Formula (II-2), (P)2 means that there are 2 polymeric blocks (the variable y is 2) and (P)o-2 means that there are 0 to 2 polymeric blocks (the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to 2). Each polymeric block being a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising a first monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. Group R1, R2, and R3 are the same as defined for Formula (I) and Formula (II).
Embodiment 8D is the polymeric material of embodiment 7D, wherein z is equal to 2 and the polymeric material is of Formula (II-2A).
P1 refers to the first polymeric block and P2 refers to the second polymeric block.
Embodiment 9D is the polymeric material of embodiment 1D, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-3).
(II-3)
In Formula (II-3), (P)3 means that there are 3 polymeric blocks (the variable y is 3) and (P)o-3 means that there are 0 to 3 polymeric blocks (the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to 3). Each polymeric block being a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising a first monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. Group R1, R2, and R3 are the same as defined for Formula (I) and Formula (II).
Embodiment 10D is the polymeric material of embodiment 9D, wherein z is equal to 3 and the polymeric material is of Formula (II-3A).
P1 refers to the first polymeric block, P2 refers to the second polymeric block, and P3 refers to the third polymeric block.
Embodiment 1E is a crosslinkable composition is provided that contains a) a polymeric material of Formula (II)
and b) a second monomer composition comprising a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups. In Formula (II), group R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2. Group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic. Each P is a polymeric block that comprises a polymerized product of a first monomer composition comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. The variables y and z refer to the number of polymeric blocks. The variable y is an integer in a range of 1 to 10, and the variable z is an integer in a range of 0 to y.
Embodiment 2E is the crosslinkable composition of embodiment 1E, wherein the polymeric material is according to any one of embodiment 2D to 6D.
Embodiment 3E is the crosslinkable composition of embodiment 1E or 2E, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) (such as Formula (II- 1)) is an elastomeric material.
Embodiment 4E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 3E, wherein the second monomer composition further comprises a monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
Embodiment 5E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 4E, wherein the crosslinkable composition comprises 1) 5 to 99.99 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 2) a second monomer composition comprising a) 0.01 to 20 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, and b) 0 to 95 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, wherein each amount is based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
Embodiment 6E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 5E, wherein the crosslinkable composition comprises 1) 10 to 60 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 2) a second monomer composition comprising a) 0.01 to 10 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, and b) 30 to 90 weight percent monomer having a
single ethylenically unsaturated group, wherein each amount is based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
Embodiment 7E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 6E, wherein the crosslinkable composition comprises 1) 10 to 40 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 2) a second monomer composition comprising a) 0.01 to 5 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, and b) 55 to 90 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, wherein each amount is based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
Embodiment 8E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 2E to 7E, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II- 1) and is a reaction product of first monomer composition comprising 40 to 100 weight percent of a low Tg monomeric unit, 0 to 15 weight percent of a polar monomeric unit, 0 to 50 weight percent of a high Tg monomeric unit (i.e., a high Tg
(meth)acryloyl -containing monomeric unit), and 0 to 15 weight percent vinyl monomeric units based on a total weight of monomeric units.
Embodiment 9E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 8E, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) has a weight average molecular weight in a range of 10,000 Daltons to 5 million Daltons.
Embodiment 10E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 9E, wherein the crosslinkable composition further comprises a photoinitiator.
Embodiment 11E is the crosslinkable composition of embodiment 10E, wherein the photoinitiator is of Formula (I).
In Formula (I), group R1, R2, and R3 are the same as in Formula (II).
Embodiment 12E is the crosslinkable composition of embodiment 10E, wherein the photoinitiator is not of Formula (I).
Embodiment 13E is the crosslinkable composition of any one of embodiments 1E to 12E, wherein the crosslinkable composition further comprises a tackifier.
Embodiment 1F is a crosslinked composition that includes a cured product of a crosslinkable composition. The crosslinkable composition is according to embodiment 1E.
Embodiment 2F is the crosslinked composition of embodiment 1F, wherein the crosslinkable composition is according to any one of embodiments 2E to 13E.
Embodiment 3F is the crosslinked composition of embodiment 1F or 2F, wherein the crosslinked composition is a pressure-sensitive adhesive.
Embodiment 1G is an article that includes a first substrate and a crosslinkable composition layer adjacent to the substrate, wherein the crosslinkable composition is of embodiment 1E.
Embodiment 2G is the article of embodiment 1G, wherein the crosslinkable composition is according to any one of embodiments 2E to 13E.
Embodiment 1H is an article that includes a first substrate and a crosslinked composition layer adjacent to the substrate, wherein the crosslinked composition layer includes a cured product of a crosslinkable composition of embodiment 1E.
Embodiment 2H is the article of embodiment 1H, wherein the crosslinkable composition is according to any one of embodiments 2E to 13E.
Embodiment II is a method of making an article. The method includes providing a first substrate and applying a layer of a crosslinkable composition adjacent to the first substrate. The crosslinkable composition is of any one of embodiments 1E to 13E. The method further includes exposing the layer of crosslinkable composition to actinic radiation to form a layer of crosslinked composition. The actinic radiation includes actinic radiation.
Embodiment 21 is the method of embodiment II, wherein the substrate is in the form of a polymeric web.
Embodiment 31 is the method of embodiment II or 21, wherein the actinic radiation is from a light emitting diode.
Embodiment 1J is an article that includes a first substrate and a layer containing the polymeric material of Formula (II) as described in any one of embodiments 1D to 6D.
Embodiment 1K is a method of making a polymeric material. The method includes providing a photoinitiator of Formula (I).
In Formula (I), group R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2. Group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic. The method further includes preparing a first reaction mixture comprising the photoinitiator of Formula (I) and a first monomer composition comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group. The method still further includes forming a first polymeric material of Formula (II- 1) from the first reaction mixture.
(II-1)
(P)i means that there is one polymeric block and (P)o-i means that there are zero or one polymeric blocks. Each polymeric block is a polymerized product of a first monomer composition.
(I-B)
In Formula (I-B), group R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, or halo. Each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
(I-C)
In Formula (I-C), group -OR10 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy and Group R2U0 is an alkyl.
Examples
Test Methods
Peel Adhesion Strength
Stainless steel (SS) panels were cleaned by wiping them three times using methyl ethyl ketone and a clean lint-free tissue. The cleaned panels were allowed to dry at room temperature. Tape samples measuring 0.5 inch (1.27 centimeters) wide and 8 inches (20.3 centimeters) long were cut, then centered on the cleaned panels and adhered to one end such that tape overlapped the panel by 25.4 millimeters (1 inch) in the lengthwise direction. The tape sample was then rolled down one time in each direction using a 4.5 pound (about 2 kilograms) rubber roller. After conditioning for 15 minutes at 23°C (73°F) and 50% relative humidity (RH), the peel adhesion strength was measured, under the same temperature and relative humidity as used above, at an angle of 180 degrees and a rate of 305 millimeters/minute (12 inches/minute) using a peel adhesion tester (IMASS Slip/Peel Tester, Model SP-2000, available from
IMASS Incorporated, Accord, MA). Four samples were evaluated, the results normalized to ounces/inch (oz/in) and the average value calculated. The results were reported in both ounces/inch (oz/in) and Newtons/decimeter (N/dm).
Shear Adhesion Strength - Elevated Temperature
Stainless steel (SS) panels were cleaned by wiping them three times using methyl ethyl ketone and a clean lint-free tissue. Tape samples measuring 0.5 inch (1.27 centimeters) wide and between 3 and 4 inches (7.6 and 10.2 centimeters) long were cut, then centered on the cleaned panels and adhered to one end such that tape overlapped the panel by 25.4 millimeters (1 inch) in the lengthwise direction. The tape sample was then rolled down one time in each direction using a 4.5 pound (ca. 2 kilograms) rubber roller. After conditioning the tape/test panel assembly for 15 minutes at 23°C (73°F) it was suspended in a stand in an oven heated to l58°F (70°C) and tilted at an angle of 2° from vertical to ensure a shear force. A 500 gram weight was hung from the free end of the tape sample. The time, in minutes, for the tape to fall from the panel was recorded. The test was terminated if failure had not occurred in 10,000 minutes and the result recorded as“10,000+”. One test sample was run for each tape construction.
Molecular Weight by Gel Permeation Chromatography
Molecular weights and polydispersity were determined at 23 °C by gel permeation
chromatography (GPC) using a Waters LC SYSTEM (Waters Corporation, Milford, MA) equipped with a Waters STYRAGEL HR 5E THF 300 millimeter (length) x 7.8 millimeter I.D. (Inside Diameter) column, in combination with a Waters 2414 REFRACTIVE INDEX DETECTOR. Sample solutions were prepared by adding 10 milliliters of tetrahydrofuran (THF) to a sample weighing between approximately 50 and 100 milligrams and mixing for at least one hour followed by filtering through a 0.2 micrometer polytetrafluoroethylene syringe filter. The injection volume was 20 microliters and the THF eluent flow rate was 1.0 milliliter/minute. Weight and Number Average Molecular Weights (Mw and Mn, grams/mole (Daltons or Da)) and polydispersity index, PDI (Mw/Mn) were determined relative to a calibration curve with polystyrene standards.
Sodium isopropyl xanthate
In a flask equipped with a mechanical stirrer, isopropanol (871.10 grams, 14.49 moles) was bubbled with nitrogen. Sodium metal cubes (20.25 grams, 0.88 moles, Sigma-Aldrich Corporation, Milwaukee, WI) were cut into small pieces and added to the flask over 3 hours. The temperature was then increased to 65°C. The sodium dissolved with evolution of hydrogen over 3 additional hours resulting in a clear solution. The mixture was cooled to 35°C using an ice bath, which resulted in a thick slurry. Carbon disulfide (73.80 grams, 0.97 moles) was then added slowly over 30 minutes. After full addition, the mixture was stirred for an additional 30 minutes resulting in a yellow solution. Solvent was removed by placing the mixture under vacuum resulting in a yellow solid. The product was further dried
under high vacuum (1 millimeter Hg) for 4 hours resulting in a yellow powder (136.67 grams). Preparation of O-IsopropyS-A-acetonyl-dithiocarbonate (PI-1)
A mixture of sodium isopropyl xanthate (5.00 grams, 32 millimoles) and acetone (35 milliliters) was cooled using an ice bath. A solution of l-chloropropan-2-one (2.59 grams, 28 millimoles, TCI America, Portland, OR) in acetone (5 milliliters) was added slowly over 5 minutes. After stirring at room temperature for 2 hours, the solvent was removed under vacuum. Ethyl acetate (30 milliliters) was added and the mixture was washed with water. The organic phase was concentrated under vacuum and the residual oil was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (2 to 20% ethyl acetate in hexanes).
A yellow oil was isolated (4.95 grams).
A mixture of potassium ethyl xanthate (6.22 grams, 39 millimoles, Alfa Aesar, Ward Hill, MA) and acetone (30 milliliters) was cooled using an ice bath. A solution of 2-chloro-l -phenyl -ethanone (5.00 grams, 32 millimoles, TCI America) in acetone (15 milliliters) was added slowly over 15 minutes. After stirring at room temperature for 1 hour, the solvent was removed under vacuum. Ethyl acetate (60 milliliters) was added and the mixture was washed with water two times. The organic phase was concentrated under vacuum and the residual oil was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (1 to 15% ethyl acetate in hexanes). A slightly yellow solid was isolated (6.04 grams).
A mixture of sodium isopropyl xanthate (4.23 grams, 27 millimoles) and acetone (50 milliliters) was cooled using an ice bath. A solution of 3-chloropentane-2,4-dione (3.00 grams, 22 millimoles, Alfa Aesar) in acetone (5 milliliters) was added slowly over 5 minutes. After stirring at room temperature for 3 hours, the solvent was removed under vacuum. Ethyl acetate (30 milliliters) was added and the mixture was washed with water. The organic phase was concentrated under vacuum and the residual oil wasu purified by column chromatography over silica gel (1 to 10% ethyl acetate in hexanes). A yellow solid
was isolated (4.30 grams).
Preparation of i,l-bis(isopropoxycarbothioylsiiifaiiyi)-2-propanone (PI-4)
A mixture of sodium isopropyl xanthate (6.86 grams, 43 millimoles) and acetone (40 milliliters) was cooled using an ice bath. A solution of l,l-dichloropropan-2-one (2.50 grams, 20 millimoles, Alfa Aesar) in acetone (5 milliliters) was added slowly over 5 minutes. After stirring at room temperature for 3 hours, the solvent was removed under vacuum. Ethyl acetate (30 milliliters) was added and the mixture was washed with water two times. The organic phase was concentrated under vacuum and the residual oil was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (1 to 10% ethyl acetate in hexanes). A yellow oil was isolated (4.73 grams).
A mixture of sodium isopropyl xanthate (10.46 grams, 66 millimoles) and acetone (50 milliliters) was cooled using an ice bath. A solution of 2, 2-dichloro-l -phenyl -ethanone (5.00 grams, 26 millimoles, Alfa Aesar) in acetone (15 milliliters) was added slowly over 15 minutes. After stirring at room temperature for 3 hours, the solvent was removed under vacuum. Ethyl acetate (60 milliliters) was added and the mixture was washed with water two times. The organic phase was concentrated under vacuum and the residual oil was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (1 to 15% ethyl acetate in hexanes). The recovered solid product was recrystallized from heptane to give a yellow solid (8.36 grams).
A mixture of sodium isopropyl xanthate (6.83 grams, 43 millimoles) and acetone (40 milliliters) was cooled using an ice bath. A solution of 2,2-dibromo-l-(4-bromophenyl)ethanone (7.00 grams, 20 millimoles, Alfa Aesar) in acetone (15 milliliters) was added slowly over 15 minutes. After stirring at room temperature for 4 hours, the solvent was removed under vacuum. Ethyl acetate (30 milliliters) was added and the mixture was washed with water two times. The organic phase was concentrated under vacuum and the recovered solid product was recrystallized from heptane two times to give a yellow solid (4.90 grams).
Preparation of l,l-bis(diethylcarbamothioylsulfanyl)-l-phenyl ethenone (PI-7)
A mixture of sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate (13.52 grams, 60 millimoles, Alfa Aesar, Ward Hill, MA) and acetone (40 milliliters) was cooled using an ice bath. A solution of 2,2-dichloro-l- phenyl-ethanone (5.00 grams, 27 millimoles, TCI America) in acetone (5 milliliters) was added slowly over 5 minutes. After stirring at room temperature for three hours, the solvent was removed under vacuum. Ethyl acetate (30 milliliters) was added and the mixture was washed with water. The organic phase was concentrated under vacuum and the crude solid was recrystallized from a mixture of heptane and ethyl acetate. A slightly yellow solid was isolated (10.09 grams).
Preparation of l,l-bis(diethylcarbamothioylsulfanyl)-2-propanone (PI-8)
A mixture of sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate (9.37 grams, 42 millimoles, Alfa Aesar) and acetone (40 milliliters) was cooled using an ice bath. A solution of l,l-dichloropropan-2-one (2.50 grams, 20 millimoles, Alfa Aesar) in acetone (5 milliliters) was added slowly over 5 minutes. After stirring at room temperature for three hours, the solvent was removed under vacuum. Ethyl acetate (30 milliliters) was added and the mixture was washed with water. The organic phase was concentrated under vacuum. A yellow solid was isolated (5.92 grams).
Preparation of Polymers
Examples 1-11 and Comparative Examples 1-3
Polymers of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA) were prepared using Photoinitiators 1-6 (PI 1-6) using the materials and amounts shown in Table 1 below as follows. A solution of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA, available from BASF Corporation, Charlotte, NC), photoinitiator, and ethyl acetate was placed in a 250 milliliter, 2-necked round bottom flask and degassed with a nitrogen stream for 15 minutes. The flask was then held under a positive pressure of nitrogen, stirred magnetically, and irradiated with light emitting diodes (LED) using a 365 nanometer LED array (Model LED365-0556 LED Bank, Clearstone Technologies, Incorporated, Hopkins, MN) at a power setting of 15% and a distance of 3 inches from the flask edge. The total energy provided after an exposure time of 5 minutes was 1850 milliJoules/square centimeters at the surface of the solution. Samples were removed at intervals throughout the polymerization and molecular weights were determined by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). Monomer conversion (mole%) was determined by proton NMR analysis in deuterated chloroform using the following procedure. The 2EHA monomer conversion was calculated as the amount of poly(2EHA) (integral of resonance at 3.94 ppm divided by 2) divided by the sum of poly(2EHA) and unreacted monomer 2EHA (integral of resonance at 5.80 ppm), with the resulting value multiplied by 100.
Table 1: Compositions
C: Comparative Example
Table 2: Results for 2EHA and PI-1
C: Comparative Example
Table 3: Results for 2EHA and PI-2
C: Comparative Example
Table 4: Results for 2EHA and PI-3
C: Comparative Example
Table 6: Results for 2EHA and PI-5
Table 7: Results for 2EHA and PI-6
Example 4 and Comparative Example 4
Copolymers of the 2EHA polymers Comparative Example 2-8 and Example 3-7, prepared as described above, and isobutyl acrylate (IBA) were prepared using the materials and amounts shown in
Table 8 below as follows. Isobutyl acrylate (2.50 grams, IBA, Alfa Aesar) and ethyl acetate (2.50 grams) were added to the final poly(2EHA) solution from Comparative Example 2 (C2-8) and Example 3 (3-7), and (5.00 grams of each solution) in vials. The solutions were purged with dry nitrogen for 10 minutes and the vials capped. The vials were then rolled and irradiated with light emitting diodes (LED) using a 365 nanometer LED array (Model LED365-0556 LED Bank, Clearstone Technologies, Incorporated) at a power setting of 15% and at a distance of 3 inches from the top of the vials. The total energy provided after an exposure time of 1 minute was 793 milli Joules/square centimeters at the top of the vial. After a total of 45 minutes of LED exposure, the mixtures were evaluated for molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). The total monomer conversion (mole%) was determined from NMR analysis using the following:
A: amount of poly-2EHA-IBA plus unreacted monomer (2EHA and IBA) =
(integral of resonances at 3.65 ppm to 4.09 ppm)
B: amount of unreacted monomer 2EHA and IBA = (integral of resonance at 5.76 ppm)
Total conversion = 100*((A-(2*B))/A).
Table 8: Compositions and Results for 2EHA Polymer and IB A
C: Comparative sample
Examples 5-8 and Comparative Example 5
Polymers of butyl acrylate (BA) were prepared using Photoinitiators 1 and 5-8 (PI-1 and PI-5 to PI-8) using the materials and amounts shown in Table 9 below as follows. A stock solution of butyl acrylate (BA, 20.00 grams, Alfa Aesar) and ethyl acetate (20.00 grams) was prepared. The photoinitiator (0.011 grams) and butyl acrylate stock solution (5.00 grams) were mixed in vials. The solutions were purged with dry nitrogen for 1 minute and the vials capped. The vials were then rolled and irradiated under a UV lamp (OSRAM SYLVANIA F15T8/BLB Blacklight Blue, peak wavelength of 362 nanometers) placed 13 centimeters above the vials. The total energy provided after an exposure time of 30 minutes was 0.04 milli Joules/square centimeters at the top of the vial. After UV exposure, the
mixtures were evaluated for molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). Monomer conversion (mole%) was determined by proton NMR analysis in deuterated chloroform using the following procedure. The BA conversion was calculated as the amount of poly(BA) (integral of resonance at 4.03 ppm divided by 2) divided by the sum of poly(BA) and unreacted monomer BA (integral of resonance at 6.40 ppm), with the resulting value multiplied by 100.
Table 9: Compositions and Results for BA Polymer
C: Comparative Example
Examples 9 and 10 and Comparative Example 6
Copolymers of the BA polymers Comparative Example 5 and Examples 5 and 6, prepared as described above, and isobomyl acrylate (IBOA) were prepared using the materials and amounts shown in Table 10 below as follows. To vials were added isobomyl acrylate (2.50 grams, IBOA, Alfa Aesar) and ethyl acetate (2.50 grams) and the final poly(BA) solutions from Comparative Example 5 and Examples 5 and 6. The solutions were purged with dry nitrogen for 1 minute and the vials capped. The vials were then rolled and irradiated under a UV lamp (OSRAM SYLVANIA F15T8/BLB Blacklight Blue, peak wavelength of 362 nanometers) placed 13 centimeters above the vials. The total energy provided after an exposure time of 30 minutes was 0.04 milli Joules/square centimeters at the top of the vials. After UV exposure for 3 hours, the mixtures were evaluated for molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). Monomer conversion (mole%) was determined by proton NMR analysis in deuterated chloroform using the following procedure. The BA conversion was calculated as the amount of poly(BA) (integral of resonance at 4.03 ppm divided by 2) divided by the sum of poly(BA) and unreacted monomer BA (integral of resonance at 6.40 ppm), with the resulting value multiplied by 100. The IBOA conversion was calculated as the amount of poly(IBOA) (integral of resonance at 4.58 ppm divided by the sum of poly(IBOA) and unreacted monomer IBOA (integral of resonance at 4.71 ppm), with the resulting value multiplied by 100.
Table 10: Compositions and Results for BA Polymer and IBOA
C: Comparative Example
Example 11
Polymers of butyl acrylate (BA) were prepared using Photoinitiator 5 (PI-5) as follows. A solution was prepared containing 20.0 grams of butyl acrylate (BA) and 0.23 grams of PI-5. Aliquots of approximately 1 gram of this solution were added to individual vials, purged with nitrogen for two minutes, and then sealed. The vials were irradiated with a UV lamp (OSRAM SYLVANIA F15T8/BLB Blacklight Blue, peak wavelength of 362 nanometers) placed 12.7 centimeters above the vials. The total energy provided after an exposure time of 30 minutes was 0.04 milliJoules/square centimeters at the top of the vials. The vials were removed from the light at various time intervals and evaluated for monomer conversion (gravimetrically and by NMR), molecular weights (by GPC and NMR), as well as fraction of free initiator, and fraction of mono-directional polymer chains (by NMR). The gravimetric weight percent (wt%) conversion of monomer was determined by recording the weight of the sample, heating the sample at l20°C for two hours, and then measuring the final weight. The wt% conversion was calculated as follows.
Wt% Conversion = final weight/initial weight) x 100
NMR analysis was carried out as follows. Approximately 50-100 milligrams of each polymer sample was dissolved in approximately 1 milliliter of deuterated chloroform and NMR spectra were acquired on a Bruker AVANCE III 500 MHz spectrometer equipped with a broadband cryoprobe.
Spectra were acquired with a low tip angle (15°) and a relaxation delay of 4 seconds for good quantitation. Two-dimensional (2D) NMR experiments (gCOSY, TOCSY, gHSQC, and gHMBC) were acquired to assign the free initiator and different polymer end groups. As the polymerization progressed, two different type of polymeric chains were observed as depicted in the schematic below.
Mono-directional Polymer Chain
Bi-directional Polymer Chain
FIG. 1 shows the aromatic region of the ' H NMR spectrum for 6% conversion (i.e. polymerization) of the monomers. The peak assignments were confirmed from a 2D gHMBC experiment. The free initiator has a sharp singlet for the methine proton between two sulfiirs at 7.09 ppm. The methine sulfur of the phenyl initiator fragment of the mono-directional polymer chain is shifted upfield to 5.46 ppm. The gHMBC correlations from this resonance to the phenyl carbonyl at 195 ppm and xanthate thiocarbonyl at 211 ppm confirm the assignment. As used herein, the term“mono-directional” refers to polymeric chains where a single radical group of formula R3-(CS)-S* has been cleaved to initiate polymeric chain growth in a single direction. The bi-directional polymer chain has only the phenyl ketone group in the core, which has resonances between 7.85-8.00 ppm that correlate to a novel carbonyl frequency at 202 ppm. As used herein, the term“bi-directional” refers to polymeric chains where two radical groups of formula R3-(CS)-S* (which in this example are both the xanthate groups i s o - C\ H 7 O - ( C S ) - S * ) have been cleaved to initiate polymeric chain growth in two directions and the resulting initiator fragment
*-CH(C=0-Ph)-* is left in the middle of the polymer chain.
A variety of parameters were determined from the integrals in the 'H NMR spectra, including percent conversion, the number average molecular weight (Mn), the mole fraction of free initiator remaining, and the mole fraction of polymeric chains that are mono-directional. Percent conversion was calculated as the amount of poly(BA) (integral of resonance at 4.03 ppm divided by 2) divided by the sum of poly(BA) and unreacted monomer BA (integral of resonance at 6.40 ppm) multiplied by 100. The degree of polymerization (DP) was determined from the moles of polymer repeat unit (integral at 4.03 ppm divided by 2) divided by the moles of polymer chains. According to the reaction scheme above, there is one mono-directional or one bi-directional phenyl group per polymer chain. The relative moles
of each polymer chain type was calculated as follows. The moles of mono-direction polymer chains were determined from the resolved methine S-CH resonance at 5.46 ppm (divided by 1). The proton resonances of the bi-directional aromatic group partially overlap with the phenyl group of the mono- directional chain and free initiator. However, the bi-directional integrals can be determined by subtraction of the relative molar amounts from other resolved resonances of the free initiator and mono- directional chain. The total integral between 7.85-8.20 ppm is the two phenyl protons adjacent to the ketone for all phenyl species. From this integral the value of 2 times the free initiator integral at 7.09 ppm and 2 times the mono-directional integral at 5.46 ppm was subtracted to determine the remaining bi directional phenyl integral. The remaining integral was divided by 2 to determine the moles of bi directional polymer chains. From the calculated DP, the number average molecular weight (Mn) was calculated as DP* 128.17 (the molecular weight of a BA repeat unit). The mole fraction of free initiator remaining was calculated from the moles of free initiator (methine S-CH integral at 7.09 ppm divided by 1) divided by the moles of total initiator species (moles free initiator plus moles mono-directional and bi directional polymer chains as described above). The mole fraction of mono-directional polymeric chains was calculated by dividing the moles of mono-directional polymeric chains by the total polymeric chains (mono-directional and bi-directional).
The results for polymer example 11 are shown in Tables 11 and 12 below. The NMR values for conversion and Mn values were similar to the results determined gravimetrically and by GPC respectively.
Table 11 : Gravimetric and GPC Results
ID: not determined
Examples 12-20
Adhesive tapes were prepared from compositions containing the materials and amounts shown in Table 13 as follows. The compositions were prepared by mixing isooctyl acrylate (IOA, 3M Corporation, St. Paul, MN), acrylic acid (AA, BASF Corporation, Florham Park, NJ), and various photoinitiators (PI) of the invention. The mixtures were purged with nitrogen for 5 minutes then exposed to an OSRAM SYFVANIA F40/350BF BFACKFIGHT (peak wavelength of 352 nanometers, 40 Watts) at a distance of 10 centimeters from the lamp with mixing until a polymeric syrup having a Brookfield viscosity of between 100 and 8000 centiPoise was formed. To the polymeric syrup thus obtained was added 2,2- dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone (IRGACURE 651 ; BASF, Corporation), hexanediol diacrylate (HDDA), and REGAFREZ 6108 (RR6108, a tackifying resin, Eastman Chemical, Kingsport, TN). These were mixed for one hour to give pre-adhesive syrup compositions. These compositions were then knife coated between a polyester film release liner and the primed surface of 0.002 inch (51 micrometers) thick primed poly(ethylene terephthalate) (PET) film (HOSTAPHAN 3 SAB PET film, Mitsubishi Polyester Film, Greer, SC) at a thickness of 0.002 inches (51 micrometers). The coated compositions were irradiated for five minutes using UVA lamps (OSRAM SYLVANIA F40/350BL BLACKLIGHT, peak wavelength of 352 nanometers, 40 Watts) to provide total UVA energy of 1050 milliJoules/square centimeter. The resulting adhesive tapes were evaluated for 180 degree angle peel adhesion strength and shear adhesion strength as described in the test methods.
Table 13: Compositions and Results
Claims
1. A polymeric material of Formula (II)
wherein
R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2;
R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or a combination thereof;
each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic;
P is a polymeric block comprising a polymerized product of a monomer composition comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group; and
y is an integer in a range of 1 to 10; and
z is an integer in a range of 0 to y.
2. The polymeric material of claim 1, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula
(II-A)
(P-A)
wherein group -OR10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy.
3. The polymeric material of claim 1, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula
(P-B)
(II-B)
4. The polymeric material of claim 1, wherein the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-C)
wherein group -OR10 is an alkyloxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy and group FT 2"0 is an alkyl.
5. The polymeric material of claim 1, wherein y is equal to 1, z is equal to 1, and the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II- 1 A)
(II- 1 A)
wherein P1 is a first polymeric block.
6. The polymeric material of claim 1, wherein y is equal to 2, z is equal to 2, and the polymeric material of Formula (II) is of Formula (II-2A)
wherein P1 is a first polymeric block and P2 is a second polymeric block.
7. A crosslinkable composition comprising:
a) a polymeric material of Formula (II)
wherein
R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2;
R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or a combination thereof;
each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic;
P is a polymeric block comprising a polymerized product of a monomer composition comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group; and
y is an integer in a range of 1 to 10; and
z is an integer in a range of 0 to y; and
b) a second monomer composition comprising a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups.
8. The crosslinkable composition of claim 7, wherein the second monomer composition further comprises a monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
9. The crosslinkable composition of claim 7 or 8, wherein the crosslinkable composition comprises 1) 5 to 99.99 weight percent polymeric material of Formula (II) and 2) a second monomer composition comprising a) 0.01 to 20 weight percent crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups, and b) 0 to 95 weight percent monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group, wherein each amount is based on a total weight of polymerized and polymerizable material.
10. The crosslinkable composition of any one of claims 7 to 9, wherein the crosslinkable composition further comprises a photoinitiator.
11. The crosslinkable composition of any one of claims 7 to 10, wherein the polymeric material is an elastomeric material and wherein the crosslinkable composition further comprises a tackifier.
12. A crosslinked composition comprising a cured product of a crosslinkable composition, the crosslinkable composition comprising:
a) a polymeric material of Formula (II)
wherein
R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2;
R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or a combination thereof;
each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic;
P is a polymeric block comprising a polymerized product of a monomer composition comprising at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group; and
y is an integer in a range of 1 to 10; and
z is an integer in a range of 0 to y; and
b) a second monomer composition comprising a crosslinking monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups.
13. An article comprising a first substrate and a crosslinked composition layer adjacent to the first substrate, wherein the crosslinked composition layer comprises the crosslinked composition of claim 12.
14. A first reaction mixture comprising:
a) an initiator compound of Formula (I)
wherein
R1 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, alkenoxy or -N(R3)2;
R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or a combination thereof; and
each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic; and b) a monomer composition 1A containing at least one monomer having a single ethylenically unsaturated group.
(I-B)
wherein
R2 is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or substituted aryl, wherein the substituted aryl is an aryl substituted with at least one alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or combination thereof; and
each R3 is an alkyl or two adjacent R3 groups are combined with the nitrogen to which they are both attached to form a first heterocyclic ring having 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, the first heterocyclic ring being saturated or unsaturated and optionally fused to one or more second rings that are carbocyclic or heterocyclic.
(I-C)
wherein
group -OR10 is an alkoxy, aralkyloxy, or alkenoxy; and
group R20 is an alkyl.
Priority Applications (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
EP18842834.6A EP3728340B1 (en) | 2017-12-19 | 2018-12-12 | Polymeric materials formed using initiators with two thiocarbonylthio-containing groups |
US15/733,169 US11492460B2 (en) | 2017-12-19 | 2018-12-12 | Polymeric materials formed using initiators with two thiocarbonylthio-containing groups |
CN201880081898.6A CN111556877B (en) | 2017-12-19 | 2018-12-12 | Polymeric materials formed using initiators having two thiocarbonylthio-containing groups |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201762607499P | 2017-12-19 | 2017-12-19 | |
US62/607,499 | 2017-12-19 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2019123124A1 true WO2019123124A1 (en) | 2019-06-27 |
Family
ID=65278408
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/IB2018/059954 WO2019123124A1 (en) | 2017-12-19 | 2018-12-12 | Polymeric materials formed using initiators with two thiocarbonylthio-containing groups |
Country Status (4)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US11492460B2 (en) |
EP (1) | EP3728340B1 (en) |
CN (1) | CN111556877B (en) |
WO (1) | WO2019123124A1 (en) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2021059072A1 (en) | 2019-09-24 | 2021-04-01 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Block copolymers with a polydiorganosiloxane block and a phosphate or phosphonate containing block |
WO2021124019A1 (en) | 2019-12-19 | 2021-06-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Block copolymers with a fluorinated block and a phosphorus-containing block |
Families Citing this family (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN117999325A (en) | 2021-09-13 | 2024-05-07 | 3M创新有限公司 | Ultraviolet-initiated adhesive compositions of (meth) acrylic-epoxy resins and adhesive-containing articles |
WO2024079548A1 (en) | 2022-10-10 | 2024-04-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Electrically debondable uv activated adhesives |
CN116041606B (en) * | 2022-12-30 | 2024-02-27 | 东华大学 | Fluorine-containing acrylate polymer adhesive and preparation method and application thereof |
Citations (11)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4181752A (en) | 1974-09-03 | 1980-01-01 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Acrylic-type pressure sensitive adhesives by means of ultraviolet radiation curing |
US4329384A (en) | 1980-02-14 | 1982-05-11 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Pressure-sensitive adhesive tape produced from photoactive mixture of acrylic monomers and polynuclear-chromophore-substituted halomethyl-2-triazine |
US4330590A (en) | 1980-02-14 | 1982-05-18 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Photoactive mixture of acrylic monomers and chromophore-substituted halomethyl-2-triazine |
US4379201A (en) | 1981-03-30 | 1983-04-05 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Multiacrylate cross-linking agents in pressure-sensitive photoadhesives |
EP0286376A2 (en) | 1987-04-07 | 1988-10-12 | Mitsubishi Petrochemical Co., Ltd. | ABA type block copolymers |
EP0349270A2 (en) | 1988-06-28 | 1990-01-03 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Pressure-sensitive adhesives |
US5506279A (en) | 1993-10-13 | 1996-04-09 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Acrylamido functional disubstituted acetyl aryl ketone photoinitiators |
US5773485A (en) | 1994-07-29 | 1998-06-30 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Acrylic syrup curable to a crosslinked viscoelastomeric material |
US5773836A (en) | 1996-10-28 | 1998-06-30 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method for correcting placement errors in a lithography system |
WO2015173194A1 (en) * | 2014-05-12 | 2015-11-19 | Solvay Specialty Polymers Italy S.P.A. | Fluoroelastomers |
WO2018013330A1 (en) * | 2016-07-11 | 2018-01-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Polymeric material and methods of making using controlled radical initiators |
Family Cites Families (13)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US2516945A (en) * | 1948-03-31 | 1950-08-01 | Du Pont | Heat stabilized polymeric 2, 3-dichloro-1,3-butadiene and process for obtaining same |
US2716633A (en) | 1954-07-22 | 1955-08-30 | Du Pont | Polymerizable compositions |
GB1084336A (en) * | 1960-07-07 | |||
US4822902A (en) | 1984-07-26 | 1989-04-18 | Rohm And Haas Company | N-acetonylbenzamides and their use as fungicides |
DE69009380T2 (en) * | 1989-09-07 | 1994-09-15 | Tosoh Corp | Chloroprene polymer. |
FR2764892B1 (en) | 1997-06-23 | 2000-03-03 | Rhodia Chimie Sa | PROCESS FOR THE SYNTHESIS OF BLOCK POLYMERS |
JP2000230611A (en) | 1999-02-15 | 2000-08-22 | Borg Warner Automotive Kk | Blade tensioner |
EP1411070A4 (en) | 2001-07-16 | 2005-06-29 | Kaneka Corp | Block copolymer |
WO2003042256A1 (en) * | 2001-11-14 | 2003-05-22 | Kaneka Corporation | Curable composition |
WO2006023790A1 (en) * | 2004-08-20 | 2006-03-02 | Noveon, Inc. | Curable thiocarbonate compounds and compositions |
CN104105718B (en) * | 2011-12-14 | 2017-05-10 | 联邦科学和工业研究组织 | RAFT polymers |
US10640686B2 (en) | 2016-12-22 | 2020-05-05 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Crosslinkable and crosslinked polymeric materials |
EP3601390B1 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2023-05-03 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Polymeric materials formed using controlled radical initiators |
-
2018
- 2018-12-12 WO PCT/IB2018/059954 patent/WO2019123124A1/en unknown
- 2018-12-12 CN CN201880081898.6A patent/CN111556877B/en active Active
- 2018-12-12 EP EP18842834.6A patent/EP3728340B1/en active Active
- 2018-12-12 US US15/733,169 patent/US11492460B2/en active Active
Patent Citations (11)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4181752A (en) | 1974-09-03 | 1980-01-01 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Acrylic-type pressure sensitive adhesives by means of ultraviolet radiation curing |
US4329384A (en) | 1980-02-14 | 1982-05-11 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Pressure-sensitive adhesive tape produced from photoactive mixture of acrylic monomers and polynuclear-chromophore-substituted halomethyl-2-triazine |
US4330590A (en) | 1980-02-14 | 1982-05-18 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Photoactive mixture of acrylic monomers and chromophore-substituted halomethyl-2-triazine |
US4379201A (en) | 1981-03-30 | 1983-04-05 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Multiacrylate cross-linking agents in pressure-sensitive photoadhesives |
EP0286376A2 (en) | 1987-04-07 | 1988-10-12 | Mitsubishi Petrochemical Co., Ltd. | ABA type block copolymers |
EP0349270A2 (en) | 1988-06-28 | 1990-01-03 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Pressure-sensitive adhesives |
US5506279A (en) | 1993-10-13 | 1996-04-09 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Acrylamido functional disubstituted acetyl aryl ketone photoinitiators |
US5773485A (en) | 1994-07-29 | 1998-06-30 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Acrylic syrup curable to a crosslinked viscoelastomeric material |
US5773836A (en) | 1996-10-28 | 1998-06-30 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method for correcting placement errors in a lithography system |
WO2015173194A1 (en) * | 2014-05-12 | 2015-11-19 | Solvay Specialty Polymers Italy S.P.A. | Fluoroelastomers |
WO2018013330A1 (en) * | 2016-07-11 | 2018-01-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Polymeric material and methods of making using controlled radical initiators |
Non-Patent Citations (8)
Title |
---|
DANIEL TATON ET AL: "Direct Synthesis of Double Hydrophilic Statistical Di- and Triblock Copolymers Comprised of Acrylamide and Acrylic Acid Units via the MADIX Process", MACROMOLECULAR RAPID COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 22, no. 18, 1 December 2001 (2001-12-01), DE, pages 1497, XP055564518, ISSN: 1022-1336, DOI: 10.1002/1521-3927(20011201)22:18<1497::AID-MARC1497>3.0.CO;2-M * |
DESTARAC ET AL., POLYM. PREPR. (AM. CHEM. SOC., DIV. POLYM. CHEM., vol. 49, no. 2, 2008 |
DESTARAC, POLYMER PREPRINTS, vol. 49, no. 2, 2008, pages 179 |
MATTIONI ET AL., J. CHEM. INF. COMPUT. SCI., vol. 42, 2002, pages 232 - 240 |
OTSU ET AL., MAKROMOL. CHEM., RAPID COMMUN., vol. 3, 1982, pages 127 - 132 |
TATON ET AL.: "Handbook of RAFT Polymerization", 2008, WILEY-VCH, pages: 373 |
TSAREVSKY ET AL.: "ACS Symposium Series", 2015, AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, article "Controlled Radical Polymerization: Mechanisms", pages: 211 - 246 |
VIJAY KUMAR PATEL ET AL: "Synthesis of alkyne-terminated xanthate RAFT agents and their uses for the controlled radical polymerization of N -vinylpyrrolidone and the synthesis of its block copolymer using click chemistry", JOURNAL OF APPLIED POLYMER SCIENCE, vol. 127, no. 6, 15 March 2013 (2013-03-15), US, pages 4305 - 4317, XP055564511, ISSN: 0021-8995, DOI: 10.1002/app.38037 * |
Cited By (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2021059072A1 (en) | 2019-09-24 | 2021-04-01 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Block copolymers with a polydiorganosiloxane block and a phosphate or phosphonate containing block |
US11505637B1 (en) | 2019-09-24 | 2022-11-22 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Block copolymers with a polydiorganosiloxane block and a phosphate or phosphonate containing block |
WO2021124019A1 (en) | 2019-12-19 | 2021-06-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Block copolymers with a fluorinated block and a phosphorus-containing block |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
EP3728340B1 (en) | 2023-11-15 |
US20210095097A1 (en) | 2021-04-01 |
US11492460B2 (en) | 2022-11-08 |
CN111556877A (en) | 2020-08-18 |
EP3728340A1 (en) | 2020-10-28 |
CN111556877B (en) | 2022-08-23 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
EP3728340B1 (en) | Polymeric materials formed using initiators with two thiocarbonylthio-containing groups | |
US10640686B2 (en) | Crosslinkable and crosslinked polymeric materials | |
US10640687B2 (en) | Polymeric materials formed using controlled radical initiators | |
EP2760960B1 (en) | Pressure-sensitive adhesives with a (meth)acrylic-based elastomeric material | |
US10913807B2 (en) | Polymeric compositions prepared with a controlled radical initiator | |
US9777198B2 (en) | Method for producing cohesive polyacrylate adhesive compounds with a narrow molar mass distribution | |
EP2760959B1 (en) | Pressure-sensitive adhesives with (meth)acrylic-based elastomeric materials prepared using (2-isopropyl-5-methyl)hexyl (meth)acrylate | |
KR101989008B1 (en) | Method for producing non-colored polyacrylate adhesive compounds with a narrow molar mass distribution | |
EP2935495A1 (en) | Pressure-sensitive adhesives prepared from degradable monomers and polymers | |
US11319461B2 (en) | Polymeric materials formed using initiators with a ketone group and two thiocarbonylthio-containing groups | |
US10941234B2 (en) | Ketone-containing controlled radical initiators for polymerization reactions |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 18842834 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2018842834 Country of ref document: EP Effective date: 20200720 |